Global Software, Inc.'s Spreadsheet Server User Manual. Release V14 R4 M177

Transcription

1 Global Software, Inc.'s Spreadsheet Server User Manual Release V14 R4 M177 Worldwide Headquarters 3201 Beechleaf Court Raleigh, NC USA EMEA/APAC Headquarters 100 Saint Paul's Churchyard London, EC4M 8BU UK

2 Spreadsheet Server All rights reserved. No parts of this work may be reproduced in any form or by any means - graphic, electronic, or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, taping, or information storage and retrieval systems - without the written permission of the publisher. Microsoft, Excel, Windows, Outlook, Office, Word, Access, and SQL Server are all registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. IBM, DB2, iseries and Lotus are trademarks or registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation. GroupWise is a registered trademark of Novell. BPCS and INFINIUM are registered trademarks of Infor Global Solutions in the United States and/or other countries. JACK HENRY trademarks are owned by Jack Henry & Associates, Inc. Lawson and Movex are registered trademarks of Lawson Software, Inc. and its affiliates. Oracle, JD Edwards, and PeopleSoft are registered trademarks of Oracle Corporation and/or its affiliates. Salesforce is a trademark of salesforce.com, inc. and is used here with permission. SAP is a registered trademark of SAP AG. Trade names referenced are the service marks, trademarks, or registered trademarks of their respective manufacturers in the United States and/or other countries. Global Software, Inc. is not associated or affiliated in any manner with the respective owners of the foregoing trademarks, trade names or service marks unless expressly stated otherwise. The respective owners of the foregoing trademarks, trade names or service marks have not endorsed, certified or approved any of Global Software, Inc.'s products for use in connection with their respective products. While every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this document, the publisher and the author assume no responsibility for errors or omissions, or for damages resulting from the use of information contained in this document or from the use of programs and source code that may accompany it. In no event shall the publisher and the author be liable for any loss of profit or any other commercial damage caused or alleged to have been caused directly or indirectly by this document. Printed: September 2014

3 Contents I Table of Contents Part I Spreadsheet Server Introduction 1 1 General... Ledger Reporting Overview 2 2 Query /... Query Designer Overview 3 3 Distribution... Manager Overview 4 4 Profile... Scheduler Overview 5 Part II Installation and Registration 6 1 Additional... Components 6 2 Register... Add-In 9 3 Uninstall... Process 10 Part III Navigation 11 1 SServer... Menu 12 2 SS Toolbar SS Ribbon Part IV Sign On 17 Part V Control Panel 18 Part VI SS Settings 22 Part VII GL Reporting 34 1 Build a... Template 35 Build a Tem plate... GXL Using Clear / Do Not Clear Worksheet 40 Build a Tem plate... GXL Using Insert Colum n Data Only 41 Build a Tem plate... GXL Using Shift Worksheet Data 42 2 Formula... Assistant 43 3 GXL Formula... for Account Values 49 4 Account... Segment Syntax 50 5 List Accounts... for a GXL Formula 52 6 Expand/Collapse... Row for a GXL Formula 53 7 Locate... Segment 55 8 Spreadsheet... Server Segment Lists 57 Create/Maintain... Segm ent Lists 57 Using Segm ent... Lists or Hierarchy Values in a GXL Form ula 61 SSLDESC Form... ula 62 View or Modify... Segm ent List Values from w ithin Excel 63 9 Calculations Calculation Options Global Software, Inc.

4 II Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 View /Refresh... Local Cache 65 View /Refresh... Global Cache 66 Disable/Enable... Form ula Calculations Drill Down... Functionality 69 General Grid Features Copy/Export... Records 72 Drill Dow n to Detailed... Account Balances 73 Drill Dow n to Sum... m arized Account Balances 74 Drill Dow n to Multi-Colum... n Account Balances 75 Drill Dow n to Journals... per Account(s) 76 Drill Dow n to Journal... Entry Lines 78 Drill Dow n to Detail... Journal Entry Lines 79 Drill Dow n to Subsystem... Detail 80 Drill Dow n to Selected... Ad Hoc Miscellaneous... Features 82 List Accounts Account Security SS Validation Generate Account... Detail for Current Sheet 86 Expand Detail... Reports (GXE) 87 Expand to Account... Balances 88 Expand to Journals Hide Row s w ith... Zero Balances 94 Reset Host Server... Connection 95 SS View Log Upgrade Segm... ent List 98 Upgrade Workbook Analyst Analyst Analyst Analyst Analyst Sign... On 100 Build... a Tem plate for GXL 102 GXL GXD BPCS BPCS Sign On BPCS 4.05 Ledger... Specifics 107 BPCS 6.02 Ledger... Specifics 109 BPCS Ledger... Specifics 111 BPCS Build a... Tem plate for GXL 113 BPCS GXL BPCS GXD BPCS 6+ GSV BPCS GXA BPCS Load Local... Data Data... Warehouse 122 Data Warehouse... Sign On 122 Data Warehouse... Ledger Specifics 123 Data Warehouse... Build a Tem plate for GXL 124 Data Warehouse... GXL 125 Data Warehouse... GXD Designer... GL 128 Designer GL... Sign On 128 Designer GL... Ledger Specifics Global Software, Inc.

5 Contents III Designer GL... Build a Tem plate for GXL 131 Designer GL... GXL Infinium Infinium Infinium Infinium Infinium Infinium Sign... On 134 Ledger... Specifics 135 Build... a Tem plate for GXL 136 GXL GXD Jack... Henry 142 JH Sign On JH Ledger Specifics JH Build a Tem... plate for GXL 144 JH GXL JH GXD JD Edwards JDE Sign On JDE Ledger Specifics JDE Build a Tem... plate for GXL 151 JDE Form ula... Assistant for GXL 152 JDE Form ula... Assistant for GXSALES 154 JDE GXL JDE GXD JDE GXSALES JDE GXSALES... Drill Dow n 161 JDE Fixed Asset... Balances 162 JDE FASTR Report... Conversion Lawson Law son Sign... On 165 Law son Build... a Tem plate for GXL 166 Law son GXL Law son GXD Movex Movex Sign On Movex Ledger... Specifics 171 Movex Build... a Tem plate for GXL 172 Movex GXL Movex GXD Oracle Oracle Sign On Oracle Ledger... Specifics 178 Oracle Build a... Tem plate for GXL 180 Oracle GXL Oracle GXD Segm ent Mapping PeopleSoft PSoft PSoft PSoft PSoft PSoft Sign On Ledger... Specifics 188 Build a... Tem plate for GXL 189 GXL GXD SAP Global Software, Inc.

6 IV Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 SAP Sign On SAP Ledger Specifics SAP Build a Tem... plate for GXL 195 SAP GXL SAP GXD Part VIII Query 1 Build... a Template for Queries Formula... Assistant for Queries GEXQ... Formula GEXD... Formula 214 GEXD Targeting... a Cell 217 GEXD Targeting... a Range 219 GEXD Targeting... a Table GEXS... Formula 223 Explore GEXI... Formula Download... Queries from Query Exchange 230 Part IX Query Designer Query... Designer Architecture 232 Ribbon Menu Explorer File... System Panel 236 Query Menu Query View Panel Table Menu Param eters Panel Field List Panel Field List Menu Builder Panel Custom Buttons SQL Text Panel QD Settings Connections Update Query... Connections Create... a New Query Save... the Query for the First Time Add Tables Create... Relationships Select... or Create Query Fields 259 Fields Used Direct... from Source Table 260 Assign Aliases... to Fields 261 Create/Edit Calculated... Fields 263 Select Fields... from a Table 264 Create Date... Fields 266 Use the CASE... Builder 268 GEXD Row Get Values Global Software, Inc.

7 Contents V 9 Add Criteria Hard Coded Criteria Create and Use... Param eters 278 Parameters... in Query Designer vs Excel 278 Standard... Parameters in the Query Designer 279 Smart Parms... Criteria Entry Rules 281 Smart Parms... in the Query Designer 282 Parameters... in Excel 284 Sub Query Colum... n 285 Assign Query GEXD Lim it Create... a Totals Query Create... the GEXQ Field SQL... SHELL Function Execute... Query Legacy... Ad Hoc Queries Query... Management 295 Dow nload or... Publish Query Exchange Queries 296 Textual Query... Definition QD View... Log 299 Part X Distribution Manager DM Navigation DistMgr Menu DM Toolbar DM Ribbon DM Settings Create... a Distribution Control Worksheet Add Specification... Rows Maintain... Specification Rows Distribute... Specifications Miscellaneous... DM Items 319 Merge Data Cache Address... Book 321 Local Address... List 322 DM View Log Part XI Profile Scheduler Address... Book Cache Distribution... Manager Profile Load... Local INF Load... Local JDE Schedule... Profile Task Define... Mapped Drives Miscellaneous... PS Items Global Software, Inc.

8 VI Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 PS View Log Database Managem... ent 343 Index Global Software, Inc.

9 Spreadsheet Server Introduction 1 1 Spreadsheet Server Introduction backbone of Global Software, Inc.'s Microsoft Excel-based Automation Roadmap that allows organizations to gain live and dynamic access from their respective ERP or relational database from within Excel to data such as: GL, AP, AR, PO, Inventory, Manufacturing, Rent Roll, Sales, Projects, Time & Attendance information and more Spreadsheet Server converts Excel into a tightly integrated analytical tool for any ERP system. Users can leverage the strength of their spreadsheets with seamless dynamic integration to their information, along with powerful drill-down capability to the lowest level of detail. It allows users to build a range of reports from simple ad hoc workbooks to complex dashboard-type views of critical business data. Spreadsheet Server eliminates the re-keying or downloading of data into the spreadsheet and makes the spreadsheet an integral part of the application. While maintaining the full functionality of their Excel spreadsheet application, Spreadsheet Server allows the user to mix GL and Non-GL data in a single worksheet. The combination of powerful spreadsheet functions (charting, graphing, text formatting and sorting) and dynamic information provides the basics for building accurate, elegant income statements, balance sheets, and other critical statements. Spreadsheet Server Components The Spreadsheet Server application consists of four components: Excel Add In for Financial Reporting across ERP platforms -- Spreadsheet Server formulas used in Excel allow users to create reports using familiar business and accounting terms, not technical specifications. Query Designer -- A user friendly tool which enables users to design and maintain queries over any relational database. These queries can be combined with pre-configured formulas in a single Excel spreadsheet. Query Exchange -- An online repository of queries from which the user may download selected queries to the Query pre configured queries together. Distribution Manager -- Eliminating the time-consuming tasks of printing, copying, or creating attachments just to get information to your end-users, this tool automates the scheduling of report distribution from directly within Excel. Profile Scheduler -- This component allows for scheduling various tasks such as caching the Distribution Manager address book, refreshing workbooks, distributing Distribution Manager workbooks, and loading local database files. Spreadsheet Server Licensed Features Access to each component is based upon the licensed features assigned to a user. General Ledger -- access to General Ledger related formulas in the Excel Add-in component. Query -- access to query related formulas in the Excel Add-In component and access to Query Exchange. Query Designer -- access to the Query Designer and Query Exchange components. Distribution Manager -- access to the Distribution Manager component. Limited Licensing -- restricts access to various Spreadsheet Server features (i.e. Build a Template, Formula Assistant, Segment Lists, Locate Segment, List Accounts, Data Validation, and Upgrade Workbook). Global Software, Inc.

10 2 1.1 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 General Ledger Reporting Overview The General Ledger (GL) Reporting feature of Global Software, Inc.'s Spreadsheet Server converts familiar spreadsheet software (Excel) into a tightly integrated analytical tool for financial systems. Spreadsheet Server uses specific formulas to retrieve General Ledger data on the spreadsheet, and gives the user the ability to drill-down to detail. Features (*) Retrieve dynamic balances based on ledger specific formats and time periods (Period, Quarter, Year-to-Date, etc.) Retrieve balances using single value, mask, range, value list, segment list, hierarchy value field Retrieve account descriptions Drill down to detailed account balances Drill down to journal detail for selected accounts Drill down to journal lines for a selected journal entry Drill down to subsystem detail for a selected journal entry Copy drill down data and paste into spreadsheets or other documents (*) Available features vary based upon the selected ledger being processed. Benefits Leverage spreadsheet skills and write reports within minutes Eliminate requirement for IT or super-users to create/change financial reports No more downloading or re-keying of spreadsheet data Reduce number of days to close financial books; save just 3 hours per month per user and the investment is paid for in less than 12 months Publish executive-quality reports from current spreadsheet software Increase the efficiency and timeliness of the budgeting process Build a complete Executive Information System Create ad hoc reports or perform account analysis within minutes Save financial user's time by combining reporting, account inquiry, and journal inquiry into one application; free up time for true business analysis Perform corporate consolidations with instant access to dynamic data Reduce external audit time by allowing easier, instant access to financial data with full drill down capabilities Reconcile accounts Print or spreadsheets quickly and easily from a single, central application

11 Spreadsheet Server Introduction Query / Query Designer Overview As an integral part of Global Software, Inc.'s Spreadsheet Server, Query Designer allows users to build queries which are then used in Excel to seamlessly retrieve critical business data and return the data for use within a spreadsheet. When using queries in Spreadsheet Server, three components work in conjunction with each other: Query Designer, a visual tool, is used to design and maintain queries. Query Exchange, an online depository of queries, is used to download selected queries to the Query Designer and then utilize them in Excel. The Excel Add-In component allows the user to execute the Query Designer queries on a spreadsheet, returning dynamic business data. Access to each component is based upon the licensed features assigned to a user. Features and Benefits Retrieve dynamic data within the company's enterprise databases (including Microsoft Access, DSN system databases, IBM iseries, Oracle, Salesforce, SAP and Microsoft SQL Server) Build a query using system provided designer tool Import/export pre-configured queries from various sources, including Global's Query Exchange Execute a query on the fly to ensure data is presented as business needs dictate Simple file system for storing and listing queries in a tree structure, similar to Windows Explorer Use data from a spreadsheet as parameters for a query Easily create formulas in spreadsheets using system provided Build a Template and Formula Assistant Perform dynamic calculations with multi-level drill downs to view associated detail Copy and paste drill down data into spreadsheets Global Software, Inc.

12 4 1.3 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Distribution Manager Overview As an integral part of Global Software, Inc.'s Spreadsheet Server, Distribution Manager is a powerful tool used to automate document distribution via , print, or file archive. Distributing spreadsheets can be a very time-consuming and laborious task. Consider the following issues: A workbook has many worksheets but only select ones are to be distributed. A workbook has external references to other workbooks needed for calculating the proper figures, but linked sheets are not to be distributed. Worksheets to be distributed contain formulas derived from a specific Excel add-in (such as Spreadsheet Server) or from a special Excel macro. The recipients do not have the add-in or macro installed on their PC. Workbooks need to be encrypted to allow/disallow opening or altering of contents. Hours are spent organizing, assembling, calculating, copying and pasting worksheets every reporting cycle. Distribution Manager takes into account each of the above issues and provides users with an easy and time-saving solution. Distribution Manager assembles Distribution Controls directly in workbooks. The number of distribution entries is limited only by the number of rows in a spreadsheet. Once the distribution rows are created, users can visually see and manage "who gets what" from one worksheet.

13 Spreadsheet Server Introduction Profile Scheduler Overview The Profile Scheduler component in Spreadsheet Server allows for scheduling various tasks such as caching the Distribution Manager address book, refreshing workbooks, distributing Distribution Manager workbooks, and loading local database files. Available Profile Types: Address Book Cache - caches the address book lists used in Distribution Manager in order to reduce the time required to load the address book. Distribution Manager - refreshes selected workbooks with specified replacement values and/or distributes selected Distribution Manager workbooks. Load Local Database Files - downloads account balance information into local databases allowing for optimized calculation speeds. This is an excellent option for producing Spreadsheet Server reports once books have been closed and the analytical tasks have been performed in real time. The time spent loading the local databases is greatly offset by the dramatically reduced spreadsheet calculation times. As Profile Scheduler works with the Microsoft Windows Task Scheduler, reference the chart below for required user right assignments: Profile Type Creating and manually running a Profile Scheduling a Profile Running a scheduled Profile while logged on Running a scheduled Profile while logged off -OR- while logged on and running a Profile under another account other than the logged on account Address Book Cache No special requirements No special requirements No special requirements No special requirements Distribution Manager No special requirements Administrator Privileges Administrator Privileges User security must have the "Run as Batch" policy added (see Note below) Load Local No special requirements No special requirements No special requirements No special requirements Note: To verify if a user is part of the Administrator group, from the desk top go to Control Panel>Administrative Tools>Computer Management. On the Computer Management panel in the tree view go to Local Users and Groups>Groups. Select Administrator and view the properties. Verify that the user is in the group or add the user to the group if necessary. To verify a user's security, from the desk top go to Control Panel>Administrative Tools>Local Security Policy. On the Local Security Policy panel in the tree view to go Local Policies>User Rights Assignment. From the list of policies, select "Log on as a batch job" and view the properties. Verify that the user is part of the policy group or add the user if necessary. If missing, Profile Scheduler will try to add the privilege for the user when saving the profile. Mapped drives used in any part of the Profile Scheduler process, including Distribution Manager (i.e. File Save Folder) or Spreadsheet Server (i.e. File Locations), must be defined on the Mapped Drives tab when running and scheduling certain profile types. Global Software, Inc.

14 6 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 2 Installation and Registration 2.1 Additional Components REQUIRED COMPONENTS Application Configurator A single installation of the Application Configurator for Spreadsheet Server must be completed by the administrator, and each user must be established and assigned a valid license key in the Configurator prior to using Spreadsheet Server. Contact the security administrator for the network location of the security and connections file. Microsoft.Net Framework Microsoft.Net Framework 4.0 is a prerequisite for Spreadsheet Server. This component must be installed prior to running the Spreadsheet Server setup program. Microsoft Visual Studio Tools for Office Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 Tools for Office Runtime is a prerequisite for Spreadsheet Server. If it is not installed, then the Spreadsheet Server setup program will force the install. Microsoft Access Database Engine 2010 Microsoft Access Database Engine for 2010 Redistributable is a prerequisite for Spreadsheet Server. If it is not installed, then the Spreadsheet Server setup program will force the install. Microsoft Visual C Microsoft Visual C Redistributable is a prerequisite for Spreadsheet Server. If it is not installed, then the Spreadsheet Server setup program will force the install. OPTIONAL COMPONENTS when using DISTRIBUTION MANAGER Distributor Outlook Add-In For Excel 2010 (or above) users utilizing Outlook, Distributor Outlook Add-In is a prerequisite for Distribution Manager. If it is not installed, then the Distribution Manager Settings function will force the installation of Distributor Outlook AddIn prior to allowing the user to select Microsoft Outlook Exchange as the Server option. Microsoft Collaboration Data Objects For Excel 2007 users utilizing Outlook, Microsoft Collaboration Data Objects (alias CDO) is a prerequisite for Distribution Manager. If it is not installed, then the Distribution Manager Settings function will force the installation of CDO prior to allowing the user to select Microsoft Outlook Exchange as the Server option. OPTIONAL COMPONENTS Based upon the database type to which Spreadsheet Server and/or Query Designer is connecting to, additional software components may be required prior to processing. Contact your IT department to determine what is required to be installed. Microsoft Access Database No further software needs to be loaded to provide connectivity to an Access database (.mdb) file. Data Source Name (DSN) Database From the desktop, select Start>Control Panel>Administrative Tools>Data Sources (ODBC) to create the DSN.

15 Installation and Registration 7 iseries DB2 Database Both the ODBC and the OLEDB Provider components of the IBM iseries Access for Windows (formerly named Client Access Express) must be installed onto each user's PC. Run the setup program within IBM iseries Access for Windows to determine that the ODBC and OLEDB Provider components are installed. Oracle Client No further software needs to be loaded to provide connectivity to an Oracle database, as Global provides a direct connection. However, if you desire to connect to the Oracle database via the Oracle Client ODBC provider, then the Oracle Client software must be installed on each user's PC. Within Oracle Client configure the local service name, and assign the appropriate host name and port number. SAP Database Global Software, Inc.

16 8 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 To access a SAP database using the GL Reporting feature, SAP R3 Version 4.7 or higher is required (note that both versions handle Unicode and Non-Unicode). However, to access a SAP database using the Query and Query Designer features, SAP Netweaver 7.0 or higher must be installed on each PC. Disk space requirements on the server are negligible (less than 10 Meg). The SAP adapter is imported to the system via an SAP transport in the "/ZGLBSOFT/" reserved namespace. This is an SAP approved mechanism for third party software which ensures no standard/custom code is overwritten on the customer system. No additional servers or server hardware is required. Microsoft SQL Server Database No further software needs to be loaded to provide connectivity to a SQL Server database, as the ODBC driver used is already loaded with Windows.

17 Installation and Registration Register Add-In During the install process the system automatically registers and initiates the Spreadsheet Server add-in for Excel. If for any reason Spreadsheet Server is not registered during installation, then it must be manually registered. In addition, if multiple users are using Spreadsheet Server on the same PC, then subsequent users must manually register the add-in. The registration process registers and initiates the add-in for Excel. Note: If the add-in is not registered on the PC, then Spreadsheet Server will not appear in the list of available add-ins for Excel. 1. From the desktop, click Start>All Programs>Global Software Spreadsheet Server>Register Add-In. The Register Spreadsheet Server Add-In panel appears. 2. Click OK to register the add-in. A panel appears indicating that the registration process is complete. 3. Click OK. Global Software, Inc.

18 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Uninstall Process Generally it is not necessary to uninstall Spreadsheet Server prior to installing new versions. An uninstall should only be performed in order to completely remove the product from the PC. 1. Ensure that Excel is not open. 2. From the desktop, click Start>Control Panel>Add or Remove Programs, -or- Programs and Features. 3. Select the Spreadsheet Server program and click Change/Remove -or- Uninstall.

19 Navigation 3 11 Navigation Spreadsheet Server uses the following navigation methods for processing functions on an Excel spreadsheet. Each function is not always available from each method. SServer Menu (see SServer Menu) Spreadsheet Server Toolbar (see SS Toolbar) Spreadsheet Server Ribbon (see SS Ribbon) NAVIGATION TIPS: Throughout the manual navigation tips, noted by the convention "NAV TIP", will be listed indicating the various paths available to access a function. Global Software, Inc.

20 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 SServer Menu After Spreadsheet Server is installed and initiated as an add-in to Excel, the SServer menu is added to Excel. The SServer menu is used to access/process various functions within the application. Note: For Excel 2003, the SServer menu is accessible from the Excel menu bar. For Excel 2007 (and above), the SServer menu is accessible from the Add-Ins ribbon. Menu Item Description Drill Down Based upon the formula in the current active cell: Opens the Drill Down panel, displaying account balances which make up the calculated amount (see Drill Down to Detailed Account Balances and Drill Down to Multi-Column Account Balances). Opens the Drill Down panel, displaying detail records for the specified query (see GEXQ Formula and GEXI Formula). Opens the Select Item panel, displaying values for the associated query (see GEXS Formula). List Accounts Opens the List Accounts panel, listing the accounts used in the GXL formula (see List Accounts for a GXL Formula) or allowing the user to generate a list of existing accounts (see List Accounts). Locate Segment Opens the Locate A Segment panel, displaying the valid fields or hierarchy values for each account segment (see Locate Segment). View Cache Opens the Local Cache panel or Global Cache panel, listing cached records (see View/Refresh Local Cache or View/Refresh Global Cache). Settings Opens the Settings panel, allowing the user to define various criteria to control processing (see SS Settings).

21 Navigation 13 Menu Item Description Hide Rows with Zero Balances Hides any row in the workbook containing GXL formulas in which the net result is zero for all cells (see Hide Rows with Zero Balances). Restore Hidden Rows Displays previously hidden rows in the workbook (see Hide Rows with Zero Balances). Generate Account Detail For Current Sheet Opens the Generate Account Detail Options panel, allowing the user to create an audit trail listing the individual accounts and balances included in the GXL formulas on the worksheet (see Generate Account Detail for Current Sheet). Generate All Detail Reports (GXE) Generates detail reports for all GXE formulas in the workbook (see Expand to Account Balances and Expand to Journals). Generate All Detail Reports (GEXD) Executes all GEXD formulas in the workbook (see GEXD Formula). Clear Cache and Recalculate / Recalculate Clears and recalculates the local cache or recalculates the global cache (see View/Refresh Local Cache or View/Refresh Global Cache). Formula Assistant Opens the Formula Assistant panel, allowing the user to maintain parameters for a formula (see Formula Assistant and Formula Assistant for Queries. Build a Template Opens the Build a Template panel, allowing the user to quickly create a template on a worksheet (see Build a Template and Build a Template for Queries. Refresh Queries Refreshes query data from Query Designer. Query data should be refreshed prior to using a new or modified query in Excel. Fix Broken Links Corrects all broken links to the.xla in the workbook. Upgrade Workbook Opens the Upgrade Workbook Options panel, allowing the user to convert various legacy Spreadsheet Server and EDASH formulas in a workbook to revised Spreadsheet Server formulas (see Upgrade Workbook). Disconnect All Open Connections Disconnects all open connections for Spreadsheet Server and queries. Disable Spreadsheet Server Closes the connection and disables Spreadsheet Server formulas (see Disable / Enable Spreadsheet Server Formula Calculations). Global Software, Inc.

22 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 SS Toolbar After Spreadsheet Server is installed and initiated as an add-in to Excel, a Spreadsheet Server (SS) toolbar is added to Excel. The SS toolbar may be used as a convenient alternative to access/process various functions in the application. Note: For Excel 2003, the SS toolbar is accessible in the standard toolbar section. For Excel 2007 (and above), the SS toolbar is accessible from the Add-Ins ribbon. Menu Item Description For Oracle ledgers only, identifies the default ledger for GXL formulas, unless the value is overridden in the formula. Upon signing onto Spreadsheet Server, the ledger defaults the value assigned in the user's settings (see Oracle Ledger Specifics). Click the down arrow and select from a list of available ledgers. Formula Assistant Opens the Formula Assistant panel, allowing the user to maintain parameters for a formula (see Formula Assistant and Formula Assistant for Queries. Data Validation Opens the Data Validation panel, allowing the user to create a validation list for a specific cell in Excel (see SS Validation). Clear Cache and Recalculate / Recalculate Drill Down Clears and recalculates the local cache or recalculates the global cache (see View/Refresh Local Cache or View/Refresh Global Cache). Based upon the formula in the current active cell: Opens the Drill Down panel, displaying account balances which make up the calculated amount (see Drill Down to Detailed Account Balances and Drill Down to Multi-Column Account Balances). Opens the Drill Down panel, displaying detail records for the specified query (see GEXQ Formula and GEXI Formula). Opens the Select Item panel, displaying values for the associated query (see GEXS Formula). Hide Zero Lines Hides any row in the workbook containing GXL formulas in which the net result is zero for all cells (see Hide Rows with Zero Balances). Unhide Zero Lines Displays previously hidden rows in the workbook (see Hide Rows with Zero Balances). Segment Lists Opens the Segment List Maintenance panel, allowing the user to create and/or maintain segment lists (see Create/Maintain Segment Lists). Settings Opens the Settings panel, allowing the user to define various criteria to control processing (see SS Settings). Closes the connection and disables Spreadsheet Server formulas (see Disable / Enable Spreadsheet Server Formula Calculations).

23 Navigation SS Ribbon After Spreadsheet Server is installed and initiated as an add-in to Excel, a custom Spreadsheet Server (SS) ribbon is added for Excel 2007 (and above). The SS ribbon may be used as a convenient alternative to access/process various functions in the application. Note: For Excel 2003, the SS ribbon is NOT applicable. If the SS ribbon does not appear, go to Settings and click the Add Excel Ribbon button (see SS Settings). Menu Item Description Recalc Recalculates all formulas in the workbook. Click the down arrow to access additional functions (i.e. recalculate formulas for workbook, worksheet or selection, refresh queries, etc.). Cache Opens the Local Cache panel or Global Cache panel, listing cached records (see View/Refresh Local Cache or View/Refresh Global Cache). Click the down arrow to access additional functions (i.e. list cache records, clear the cache and recalculate -or- recalculate). Note: When using Local Cache, the Cache icon will be yellow. When using Global Cache, the Cache icon will be red when items are pending and green when all items are calculated/completed. Generate Reports Generates detail reports for all GXE and GEXD formulas in the workbook (see Expand to Account Balances, Expand to Journals, and GEXD Formula). Click the down arrow to access additional functions (i.e. all or selected GXEs, account detail report (see Generate Account Detail for Current Sheet), all or selected GEXDs. Drill Down Hide Rows Global Software, Inc. Based upon the formula in the current active cell and the default action assigned for the Drill Down button in the user's settings: Opens the Drill Down panel or a worksheet, displaying account balances which make up the calculated GXL amount(s) (see Drill Down to Detailed Account Balances and Drill Down to Multi-Column Account Balances). Opens the Drill Down panel or a worksheet, displaying detail records for the specified query (see GEXQ Formula and GEXI Formula). Opens the Select Item panel, displaying values for the associated query (see GEXS Formula). Click the down arrow to access additional functions (i.e. drill down to panel or worksheet options (see Drill Down to Journals per Account(s) and Drill Down to Selected Ad Hoc), summary drill down (see Drill Down to Summarized Account Balances) and related summary drill down options). Hides any row in the workbook containing GXL formulas in which the net result is zero for all cells (see Hide Rows with Zero Balances). Click the down arrow to access additional functions (i.e. hide zero rows for worksheet or workbook).

24 16 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Menu Item Description Restore Rows Displays previously hidden rows in the workbook (see Hide Rows with Zero Balances). Click the down arrow to access additional functions (i.e. restore hidden zero rows for worksheet or workbook). Expand GL Row Expands the balances for the selected GXL formulas on a row into account details (see Expand/Collapse Row for a GXL Formula). Click the down arrow to access additional functions (i.e. expand row or all rows). Collapse GL Row Removes the expanded account detail rows in the selected section (see Expand/Collapse Row for a GXL Formula). Click the down arrow to access additional functions (i.e. collapse row, or all rows on the worksheet or in the workbook). Formula Assistant Opens the Formula Assistant panel, allowing the user to maintain parameters for a formula (see Formula Assistant and Formula Assistant for Queries. Build a Template Opens the Build a Template panel, allowing the user to quickly create a template on a worksheet (see Build a Template and Build a Template for Queries. Explore Opens the Select Item panel with the values returned from the specified query, allowing the user to select values to be returned to the spreadsheet (see Explore). Segment Lists Opens the Segment List Maintenance panel, allowing the user to create and/or maintain segment lists (see Create/Maintain Segment Lists). Locate Segment Opens the Locate A Segment panel, displaying the valid fields or hierarchy values for each account segment (see Locate Segment). Tools: Data Validation Opens the Data Validation panel, allowing the user to create a validation list for a specific cell in Excel (see SS Validation). Fix Broken Links Corrects all broken links to the.xla in the workbook. Upgrade Workbook Opens the Upgrade Workbook Options panel, allowing the user to convert various legacy Spreadsheet Server and EDASH formulas in a workbook to revised Spreadsheet Server formulas (see Upgrade Workbook). Disconnect All Open Connections Disconnects all open connections for Spreadsheet Server and queries. View Log Opens the Log Viewer panel, where the user may view, filter or copy log entries, and or clear the log file (see SS View Log). Click the down arrow to access additional functions (i.e. view log, clear log, or turn enhanced logging on/off). Settings Opens the Settings panel, allowing the user to define various criteria to control processing (see SS Settings). Enabled / Disabled Displays the current status. Click to toggle -or- click the down arrow to access individual Enable and Disable options (see Sign on).

25 Sign On 4 17 Sign On Follow the steps below to start the add-in component of Spreadsheet Server. When user settings are set to start Spreadsheet Server during Excel start up, then step 2 is not applicable. When unattended (auto) sign on is activated, steps 3 and 4 are not applicable. 1. Start Excel. 2. In Excel from the SServer Disabled menu, select Start Spreadsheet Server -or- select the ribbon equivalent (see SS Ribbon). The appropriate Login or Sign On dialog box appears based upon the selected ledger. Note: For Data Warehouse and most Designer GL ledgers, no dialog box appears. 3. Enter the appropriate data on the Login or Sign On dialog box. 4. Click Login or OK. Use the following links to access ledger specific sign on information: Analyst Data Warehouse Jack Henry 20/20 Oracle BPCS 4.05 Designer GL JD Edwards PeopleSoft BPCS 6.02 Infinium Lawson SAP BPCS 6.04 Jack Henry Silverlake Movex Global Software, Inc.

26 18 5 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Control Panel The Spreadsheet Server Control Panel is a central panel from which multiple functions can be accessed from outside the standard Excel interface. These same functions may also be accessed from the Spreadsheet Server menu, toolbar or ribbon within Excel. For example, from the Control Panel: GL reporting users may view account balances for a selected account string, and may subsequently drill down to the journals and journal entry lines which make up the balance. Query users may view the results of an GEXQ formula, and may also drill down to supporting detail. To Access the Control Panel: 1. From the desktop, click Start>Programs>Global Software Spreadsheet Server>Spreadsheet Server Control Panel. The appropriate Login or Sign On dialog box appears based upon the selected ledger. Use the following links to access ledger specific sign on information: 2. Analyst Data Warehouse Jack Henry 20/20 Oracle BPCS 4.05 Designer GL JD Edwards PeopleSoft BPCS 6.02 Infinium Lawson SAP BPCS 6.04 Jack Henry Silverlake Movex Enter the appropriate data on the Login or Sign On dialog box, then click Login or OK. The Spreadsheet Server Control Panel appears.

27 Control Panel Some of the fields on the GL Balances tab will vary based upon the selected ledger; however, basic processing is the same for all ledgers. Use the table as an overview for entering data on the Spreadsheet Server Control Panel GL Balances tab, or to access other functions. Links are available at the bottom of the table to access ledger specific GXL information. Field Description Key 1 This header and field value will vary based upon requirements for the selected ledger. Ex: Oracle - Key 1 = Balance Type Key 2 This header and field value will vary based upon requirements for the selected ledger. Ex: Oracle - Key 2 = Budget/En Type Year Specify the reporting year. Format Displays PER, indicating the time range for which to retrieve data. Period Click the down arrow and select the corresponding period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e. 1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format. Key 3 Data These headers and field values will vary based upon requirements for the selected ledger. Ex: Oracle - Key 3 Data = Translated, Currency, Ledger (a.k.a. Book), and Summary Accts Designer GL Definition Click the down arrow and select a Designer GL Definition from which to retrieve data. After selecting a value, the system changes the parameters on the panel to match the selected definition. Account String Key the value for each segment in the account string for the GXL formula or click the ellipse button to select from a list of valid segment values. Segments will vary based upon the selected ledger. Values may be single value, mask, range, value list, segment list, hierarchy value field (see Account Segment Syntax). GL Balances 0-15 Displays the calculated period balances for the selected account string. Function Description Generate - GXL Calculates period balances for the selected account string, and subsequently allows for drilling down to the supporting journals. Segment Lists Opens the Segment List Maintenance panel, allowing the user to create and/or maintain segment lists (see Create/Maintain Segment Lists). Accounts Profile Opens the Accounts Profile panel, allowing the user to view and/or maintain the list of account strings to which they have access authority (see Account Security). Settings Opens the Settings panel, allowing the user to define various criteria to control processing (see SS Settings). Accesses the online user manual. Help Use the following links to access ledger specific GXL information: Analyst Data Warehouse Jack Henry 20/20 Oracle BPCS 4.05 Designer GL JD Edwards PeopleSoft BPCS 6.02 Infinium Lawson SAP BPCS 6.04 Jack Henry Silverlake Movex Global Software, Inc.

28 20 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M To display balances for the account string, from the ribbon select Generate. Balances are displayed in Period 0 to 15 fields. 5. To view account balances, click the corresponding Drill button ( to Detailed Account Balances). 6. Use the table to enter data on the Spreadsheet Server Control Panel - Query tab, or to access other functions. Field Query Name ). The Drill Down panel appears (see Drill Down Description When the query resides in the File System, click the Open From File button ( ) to navigate to and select the query to be executed. When the query resides in Query Exchange, click the Search Online button ( ) to navigate to and select the query to be executed (see Download Queries from Query Exchange). Total Field If the GEXQ summary field is to be defined within the formula, click the down arrow and select the field to be summarized. Note: Only fields assigned an alias appear in the drop down list. Total Type If the GEXQ summary field is to be defined within the formula, click the down arrow and select the summary type (i.e. SUM, COUNT, MIN, MAX). Parameters: The parameter related fields only appear when parameters have been specified in the selected query definition. Display/Use If selected, the query parameter is included in the formula.

29 Control Panel Field 21 Description Value Specify the value (i.e. single value, a wildcard, list, range, or segment list) to be used when generating the query results. Results Displays the calculated value for the selected query. Function Description Generate - GEXQ Calculates a single value from the GEXQ (summary) portion of the query in the Results field, and subsequently allows for drilling down to the supporting detail (see GEXQ Formulas). Segment Lists Opens the Segment List Maintenance panel, allowing the user to create and/or maintain segment lists (see Create/Maintain Segment Lists). Settings Opens the Settings panel, allowing the user to define various criteria to control processing (see SS Settings). Help Accesses the online user manual. 7. To display the result for the specified query, from the ribbon select Generate. The calculated value displays in the Results field. 8. To view supporting detail, click the corresponding Drill button ( Formulas). Global Software, Inc. ). The Drill Down panel appears (see GEXQ

30 22 6 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 SS Settings Spreadsheet Server (SS) Settings allow the user to define various criteria to control processing. The majority of the options define processing for all users on the PC; however, various options (auto-start, display tooltips, enhanced logging, and expand rows) are defined for each individual user. Settings for General Ledger Type, and Segment Lists, Ad Hocs Queries, Designer GL Definitions and EDQ Files locations may be set and/or overridden based upon parameters defined in Application Settings in the Configurator. Note: Various Settings panels are conditional and based upon the user's licensed features. 1. In Excel from the SServer menu, select Settings. The Settings - General panel appears. Nav Tip: This panel may also be accessed by selecting the Settings button on the Control Panel -or- by selecting the toolbar or ribbon equivalent (see SS Toolbar or SS Ribbon).

31 SS Settings Use the table to enter data on the General panel, or to access other functions. Field Description General Options: General Ledger Type Click the down arrow and select the General Ledger type being used. When not licensed to use the General Ledger feature, the value is set to "None." Note: After a selection is made, the system automatically navigates to the associated ledger specific panel. Label Language Click the down arrow and select the language to be used to display labels on various panels (only applies to Build a Template, Formula Assistant, SServer Menu, SS Ribbon, and right click context menu). Connection Options: iseries/dsn/sqlserver/oracle Specify the connection protocol to be used to connect to the host system. Network Security & Connections Files Key the path or use the Browse button to select the location of the Security and Connections File as specified in the Configurator. This function is password protected. Note: When in demo mode, select the desired security and connections file in order to switch to standard mode. Available Environments Specify the environment to be used for processing. This section only appears when the Network Security and Connection Files location is on the network and an available training environment exists. Standard Options: Start Automatically When Excel Starts If selected, Spreadsheet Server automatically starts each time Excel is started. Otherwise, Spreadsheet Server must be manually started each time Excel is started. Enhanced Logging If selected, additional logging is recorded. For optimal processing, once an error has been resolved it is recommended to clear the log file and deselect the option (see SS View Log). Nav Tip: Use the View Log button to display, or clear the log file. Override List Separator With Specify the character to use to as the list separator in Excel formulas. Generally this value should be a comma unless using different regional settings. Contact Global for more information. SQL Timeout Specify the maximum time allowed for a query to run on the host system. Delimiter for Separating From/ To Values in a Range Specify the delimiter for separating from/to values in a range. This defaults to a period and should only be changed if periods exist within the account segment values. Display Tooltips If selected, tooltips display on various Spreadsheet Server panels (only applies to Settings, Build a Template and Formula Assistant). Disable SS Keyboard Shortcuts If selected, all Spreadsheet Server keyboard shortcuts are disabled. Drill Down Options: Drill Down Global Software, Inc. Specify when displaying drill down results on a panel whether to use a single dialog panel per drill down or whether subsequent drill downs appear on a different tab within the same panel.

32 24 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Field SSRibbon Drill Down Button Default Action Description Specify whether the Drill Down button on the SSRibbon displays results on a panel or pushes results to a worksheet. Drill Down to Worksheet Goes Specify when pushing drill down results to a worksheet whether to create a To new worksheet each time or to reuse the same drill down worksheet. Drill Down to Worksheet Data Goes To Specify when pushing drill down results to a worksheet whether to place the drill down down in a table, range or cell. Cache: Cache Type Click the down arrow and select whether to use Local, Global Cache, or Global Cache with Redis Technology. Additional options are available based upon the cache type selected. (see View/Refresh Local Cache or View/Refresh Global Cache). Note: Additional component(s) must be installed to implement either the Global Cache or Global Cache with Redis Technology options. Contact Global for more information. Global Cache URL Specify the URL for the global cache. Redis Server / Database ID / Password Specify the server, database ID and password associated with the Redis database. Use Shared Cache If selected, shared user data in the cache is used for processing. If not selected, cache records generated by the user are used for processing and user security remains intact. Auto Refresh Pending Items If selected, any items in the cache which are pending will refresh and continue to process. If not selected, any formulas which were pending will continue to display 'Pending' in the workbook until manually refreshed to bring in a value. Button Function Demo Allows the user to switch from standard to demo mode. The button only appears when the user is in standard mode. View Log Opens the Log Viewer panel, where the user may view, filter or copy log entries, and or clear the log file (see SS View Log). Maintain Segment Lists Opens the Segment List Maintenance panel, allowing the user to create and/or maintain segment lists (see Create/Maintain Segment Lists). Add Excel Ribbon Registers and adds the SS ribbon in Excel. The button only appears when the ribbon is not currently registered for an Excel 2007 or above user.

33 SS Settings Use the table to enter data on the GL Reporting panel, or to access other functions. Field Description GL Reporting Options: Drill Down: Include Zero If selected, accounts with activity but zero balances are included on the Balance Accounts with Activity account balances drill down panel, and in the expand row and GXE results. Summary Drill Down: Prompt for Processing Criteria If selected, a prompt panel appears when the Summary Drill Down function is selected allowing the user to define processing criteria; otherwise, default selection criteria is used. GXL: Insert Trailing Dash If selected, a dash is appended at the end of the account string. Template: Default Currency Specify the currency value to default when using Build a Template. GXE: Last Processing Column Specify the last column GXE formulas will process. Delimiter for Separating Account Segments Specify the delimiter for separating account segments. Expand GL Row Function Expands Detail Rows Specify whether the Expand GL Row function expands detail rows up or down. Global Software, Inc.

34 26 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Button Function Maintain Accounts Profile Opens the Accounts Profile panel, allowing the user to view and/or maintain the list of account strings to which they have access authority (see Account Security). Refresh Cached Segment Values Refreshes cached GL account segment values. 4. Ledger Specific panels are used to maintain criteria specific to the ledger. Use the following links to access ledger specific settings information. Analyst (N/A) Data Warehouse Jack Henry 20/20 Oracle BPCS 4.05 Designer GL JD Edwards PeopleSoft BPCS 6.02 Infinium Lawson (N/A) SAP BPCS 6.04 Jack Henry Silverlake Movex

35 SS Settings Use the table to enter data on the Quarters panel. Field Description Accounting Quarter Periods Specify the starting/ending period numbers for each of the four quarters. Global Software, Inc.

36 28 6. Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Use the table to enter data on the Ad Hoc Queries panel. Field Description Ad Hoc Queries: Filter by GL If selected, only ad hoc queries associated with the selected ledger are listed on the panel and are included in the list of ad hoc queries in the drill down feature. De-select to list all available ad hoc queries. SQL is Read Only If selected, ad hoc queries may not be created, edited, copied or deleted. This function is password protected. Contact Global for more information. Button Function Test Runs the selected ad hoc query and displays the results in a Drill Down panel.

37 SS Settings Use the table to enter data on the Query panel. Field Description Query Options: Limit GEXD to 64K Rows/ Sheet If selected, the output of a GEXD formula is limited to 64,000 rows per sheet and the query terminates when the output exceeds the limit. Note: For Excel 2003 and prior users, it is suggested to select this option. For Excel 2007 (.xlsx) users, it is suggested to not select this option to tak e advantage of the more than a million rows available. Query Timeout Specify the desired timeout limit for query process time. Global Software, Inc.

38 30 8. Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 The File Locations panel displays the location of various files used in the product. File locations which are highlighted have been preloaded based upon settings in the Configurator. Use the table to enter data on the File Locations panel. Field Description File Locations: Shared Documents For Administrators in Citrix environments only, use the Browse button to select the location to which to move the basic folders. This function is password protected. Contact Global for more information. Segment Lists Key the path or use the Browse button to specify the location of the Segment Lists database and Segment Mapping objects. This may be a local or network drive. Local Cache Key the path or use the Browse button to specify the location of the local cache database. Ad Hoc Queries Key the path or use the Browse button to specify the location of the ad hoc queries, this folder should be reserved for ad hoc queries only. PC Local Database For BPCS and Data Warehouse ledgers only, key the path or use the Browse button to specify the location of the local.mbd database. This location may also be updated from the Load Local PC Database or the Load Data Warehouse from GL panels.

39 SS Settings Field Description Budget Manager Balances For BPCS, Infinium and JDE ledgers only, key the path or use the Browse button to specify the location of the budget balances when using Global's Budget Manager application. Designer GL Definitions Key the path or use the Browse button to specify the location of the Designer GL definitions. Drill Down Layouts Key the path or use the Browse button to specify the location of the userdefined drill down grid layouts. EDQ Files Key the path or use the Browse button to specify the location of the EDQ query files. The System Information panel displays various data related to the user's system and Spreadsheet Server. To this information to the helpdesk, click the button. The system opens a new Outlook panel with the contents of this panel in the body of the . Modify the address and/or text of the body as necessary and click the Send button. Global Software, Inc.

40 32 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M The Performance panel displays various performance counts and statistics with respect to how the product is processing. Use the table to enter data on the Performance panel, or to access other functions. Field Description SQL Execution Threshold Specify the time limit (in seconds) for which to create an entry in the error log when a SQL statement exceeds the threshold specified. Button Function Reset Statistics Clears the performance statistic values, thus allowing counts and statistics to start accumulating again. Opens a new Outlook panel with system information and performance data in the body of the . Modify the address and/ or text of the body as necessary and click the Send button.

41 SS Settings The About panel displays Global's contact information. Click the Online Manuals link to access the online user manual. 12. Click OK. The system writes the changes made on the current panel and closes the panel. Global Software, Inc.

42 34 7 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 GL Reporting Spreadsheet Server retrieves financial data from the General Ledger into Excel using the following formulas: Formula Description GXL Returns an account balance (see GXL Formula for Account Values and see links below to access ledger specific GXL information). GXD Returns an account segment or account string description (see links below to access ledger specific GXD information). GXE Explodes summary data line into detail data lines (see Expand to Account Balances and Expand to Journals). GXC Customized formula. Contact Global for configuration of new formulas. SSLDESC Returns a segment list description (see SSLDESC Formula). GXSALES For JDE ledgers only, returns sales totals based upon sales criteria (see JDE GXSALES). Note: Formulas available for processing are based upon the user's licensed features. See Query for query related formulas. These formulas can be used in a spreadsheet cell in the same manner as other spreadsheet functions. Spreadsheet Server provides tools for starting a spreadsheet (see Build a Template) and for entering formulas (see Formula Assistant). Use the following links to access ledger specific GXL information: Analyst Data Warehouse Jack Henry 20/20 Oracle BPCS 4.05 Designer GL JD Edwards PeopleSoft BPCS 6.02 Infinium Lawson SAP BPCS 6.04 Jack Henry Silverlake Movex Use the following links to access ledger specific GXD information: Analyst Data Warehouse Jack Henry 20/20 Oracle BPCS 4.05 Designer GL (N/A) JD Edwards PeopleSoft BPCS 6.02 Infinium Lawson (N/A) SAP BPCS 6.04 Jack Henry Silverlake Movex

43 GL Reporting Build a Template Build a Template is a tool used to aid in quickly creating a template on a Spreadsheet Server spreadsheet. This tool populates the necessary rows and columns with required parameters and account segment values as provided by the user. The tool inserts a GXL or GXE formula using the parameters and account segment values. Note: Formulas available in the Build a Template function are based upon the user's licensed features. See Build a Template for Queries for query related formulas. 1. In Excel from the SServer menu, select Build a Template. The Build a Template panel appears opening to the last used formula. Nav Tip: This panel may also be accessed by pressing Shift+Ctrl+B -or- by selecting the ribbon equivalent (see SS Ribbon). 2. Select the desired formula on the Formulas fly out window. The selected formula panel appears. Global Software, Inc.

44 36 3. Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Some fields on the Build a Template - GXL panel will vary based upon the selected ledger; however, basic processing is the same for all ledgers. Use the table as an overview for entering data on the Build a Template GXL panel. Links are available at the bottom of the table to access ledger specific Build a Template - GXL information. Field Description GXL: Returns a single balance from the ledger (see GXL Formula for Account Values). Worksheet Click the down arrow and select the worksheet name which will receive the template. Key 1 This header and field value will vary based upon requirements for the selected ledger. Ex: Oracle - Key 1 = Balance Type Key 2 This header and field value will vary based upon requirements for the selected ledger. Ex: Oracle - Key 2 = Budget/En Type Year Click the down arrow and select the reporting year. Format Click the down arrow and select the time range for which to retrieve data. Basic valid formats are PER, QTR, YTD, LTD, and RANGE; however, some ledgers may have other valid formats. Period Click the down arrow and select the corresponding period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e. 1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format. Key 3 Data These headers and field values will vary based upon requirements for the selected ledger. Ex: Oracle - Key 3 Data = Translated, Currency, Ledger (a.k.a. Book), and Summary Accts Ledger Specific Processing Options These headers and field values will vary based upon requirements for the selected ledger. Ex: Oracle - FSG Templates and Convert Missing Values to Parent Hierarchies Starting Column Specify the starting column for the template. Starting Row Specify the starting row for the template. Available Designer GL Definitions Click the down arrow and select a Designer GL Definition from which to retrieve data. After selecting a value, the system changes the parameters on the panel to match the selected definition. Line Description Specify a description for the account or group of accounts specified. Clear Worksheet / Do Not Clear Worksheet / Shift Worksheet Data Specify when inserting data whether to clear all cell data on the target worksheet, to not clear cell data on the target worksheet, or to insert the GXL formula in the target cell and then to insert the ledger and segment specific data to newly inserted columns and rows to the top and to the left of the existing worksheet data (see Build a Template GXL Using Clear / Do Not Clear Worksheet and Build a Template GXL Using Shift Worksheet Data). Insert Column Data Only This option is enabled after data has been inserted using the Insert icon on the toolbar. If selected, an additional column of parameters is inserted (see Build a Template GXL Using Insert Column Data Only). Skip a Row If selected, an additional row is inserted between the last column parameter and the account segment title row. Invert Sign If selected, the account balance sign displayed is reversed.

45 GL Reporting 37 Field Description Account Segments: If necessary, use the scroll bar to access additional account segments. Display/Use If selected, the account segment is included in the formula. Note: Segments may only be excluded from the bottom up. Row/Col Select the button to toggle between Row and Col. This button determines if the account segment will be located in the template parameters column or by default, on the template account segment row. Description Specify the description to be used as the account segment title. Value Specify the value to default on the template for the account segment or click the ellipse button to select from a list of valid segment values. The value may be a single value, mask, segment list, hierarchy field or the first value in a range (see Account Segment Syntax). Range Thru Value If applicable, select the check box and specify the ending range value for the account segment. Use the following links to access ledger specific Build a Template - GXL information: Analyst Data Warehouse Jack Henry 20/20 Oracle BPCS 4.05 Designer GL JD Edwards PeopleSoft BPCS 6.02 Infinium Lawson SAP BPCS 6.04 Jack Henry Silverlake Movex Global Software, Inc.

46 38 4. Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Use the table to enter data on the Build a Template - GXE panel. Note: Optionally use Formula Part 2 to add a second GXE calculation in a single GXE formula, thus allowing for both account and journal details to be expanded from one GXE formula. Field Description GXE: Fills detail account balances or journal details into the specified worksheet (see Expand to Account Balances and Expand to Journals). Starting Column Specify the starting column for the template. Starting Row Specify the starting row for the template Source Worksheet Click the down arrow and select the name of the worksheet that contains the summary formulas to be expanded and onto which to insert the GXE formula. Target Worksheet Click the down arrow and select the name of the new or existing worksheet that contains the final formatted worksheet and will receive the expanded detail. Source Detail Row Specify the row number on the source worksheet that contains the summary formulas. Target Table, Range, or Row Specify the target table, range name, or first row on the target worksheet to begin inserting the expanded detail. Headings Click the down arrow and select whether or not to include column headings when expanding details. If not specified, N (No) is assumed. Autofit Click the down arrow and select whether or not to autofit columns when expanding details. If not specified, N (No) is assumed. Clear Sheet Click the down arrow and select whether or not to clear the target worksheet before expanding details. If not specified, N (No) is assumed. Note: This value MUST be N when a TABLE or RANGE is specified for the Target Table/Range/Row parameter. Journals Only Column Specify the column for which to generate journal detail (see Expand to Journals). Note: This function is not applicable for Analyst ledgers. Journals Ad Hoc Query If desired, click the down arrow and select the ad hoc query to be used to generate journal detail. Note: This function is not applicable for Analyst ledgers. An ad hoc query is required to expand journal detail for Data Warehouse and Designer GL ledgers. Filter by GL If selected, the queries listed in the Journals Ad Hoc Query drop down list are limited to the ledger specified in the associated field. Note: This function is not applicable for Analyst ledgers. GL for Filtering (no label) If the Filter by GL option is selected, click the down arrow and select the ledger for which to list ad hoc queries in the Journals Ad Hoc Query drop down list. Note: This function is not applicable for Analyst ledgers.

47 GL Reporting Field Summarize Balance Level 39 Description If desired, specify the account segment number (break level) to be used for summarizing data when expanding account balances. Ex: Account String = Company, Department, Account, Sub-Account. To summarize balances at the account level enter '3' (third account segment). In addition for JDE ledgers only, if desired specify field alias or field name (as defined in the Configurator) for an AcctCatCode or BUCatCode to control how to group expanded data. This replicates the legacy SSJDE GXECC formula. 5. Total Journal Level If desired, specify the account segment number for which to generate subtotals when expanding journal entry details. Subtotals are generated at the selected level and each previous level. Ex: Account String = Company, Department, Account, Sub-Account. Enter a '3' (third account segment) to generate subtotals at the account, department, company and grand total level. Note: This function is not applicable for Analyst, Data Warehouse, or Designer GL ledgers. For SAP ledgers the maximum allowable segment number for totaling is '4'. If a segment level greater than the number of segments allowed by the ledger is entered, the system will use the maximum allowable number of segments. Note: For JDE ledgers only, when the Summarize Balance Level is an AcctCatCode or field alias or field name then an 'extra' account segment representing the category code is added to the front of the account string. This will need to be tak en into consideration when specifying the account segment number for which to generate subtotals. Convert Journals to Table Click the down arrow and select whether or not to place expanded journal entry details into a table. When this option is utilized, the system creates a new table on the specified target worksheet and assigns the next available standard Excel table name. The table includes headers and grand totals, except when a journals ad hoc query is used. This option is ignored if the specified Target is a range or table, or if Total Journal Level is not blank. If not specified, N (No) is assumed. Note: This function is not applicable for Analyst ledgers. After the appropriate data has been entered and verified, click one of the following toolbar icons or buttons. Insert (icon) -- inserts parameter labels and values, and the formula to the selected worksheet, increments Period and Starting Column/Row values for the next GXL formula, and keeps the panel open for additional inserts. Copy (icon) -- copies the formula to the Windows clipboard. Insert (button) -- inserts parameter labels and values and the formula to the selected worksheet and closes the panel. Cancel/Close (button) -- closes the panel. Global Software, Inc.

48 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Build a Template GXL Using Clear / Do Not Clear Worksheet The following example demonstrates using the Clear Worksheet and/or the Do Not Clear Worksheet options when processing a GXL formula from the Build a Template function. 1. From an open worksheet in Excel, from the SServer menu -or- SS ribbon, select Build a Template. The Build a Template panel appears. 2. Key the appropriate ledger parameters and account segment data. 3. Click the Insert button at the bottom of the panel. The panel closes and the template is generated.

49 GL Reporting Build a Template GXL Using Insert Column Data Only The following example demonstrates using the Insert Column Data Only option when processing a GXL formula from the Build a Template function. This option is used to insert multiple columns onto a single worksheet. 1. From an open worksheet in Excel, from the SServer menu -or- SS ribbon, select Build a Template. The Build a Template panel appears. 2. Key the appropriate ledger parameters and account segment data. 3. Click the Insert icon on the toolbar. The template is generated, but the panel remains open and the Period, Starting Column and Starting Row values are incremented, and the Insert Column Data Only check box is selected. 4. Key any necessary changes to the ledger parameters. 5. Click the Insert icon on the toolbar. The column data and GXL formula are added to the template, and the Period, Starting Column and Starting Row values are incremented. 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all desired columns are added. 7. Click the Close button to close the panel. Global Software, Inc.

50 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Build a Template GXL Using Shift Worksheet Data The following example demonstrates using the Shift Worksheet Data option when processing a GXL formula from the Build a Template function. This option is used to insert the required rows and columns used for a GXL formula into an existing non-spreadsheet Server worksheet. 1. Start with an existing non-spreadsheet Server worksheet in Excel. Select the first cell to be populated with a formula (i.e. B4 in the spreadsheet below), then from the SServer menu -or- SS ribbon, select Build a Template. The Build a Template panel appears. 2. Select the option Shift Worksheet Data. The Starting Column and Starting Row fields are modified to display the cell previously selected on the worksheet. 3. Enter the appropriate values on the Build a Template panel. 4. Click the Insert icon -or- button. The panel closes and the column and row parameters, and formula are added to the existing worksheet.

51 GL Reporting Formula Assistant The Formula Assistant is a tool used to aid in quickly creating formulas on a Spreadsheet Server spreadsheet. Note: Formulas available in the Formula Assistant function are based upon the user's licensed features and selected ledger. See Formula Assistant for Queries for query related formulas. See JDE Formula Assistant for GXSALES for JDE ledger specific GXSALES formula. 1. In Excel from the SServer menu, select Formula Assistant. The Formula Assistant opens to the GXL panel -or- if Formula Assistant was launched while on a SS formula, the corresponding formula panel appears. Nav Tip: This panel may also be accessed by pressing Shift+Ctrl+F -or- by selecting the toolbar or ribbon equivalent (see SS Toolbar or SS Ribbon). 2. Select the desired formula on the Formulas fly out window. The selected formula panel appears. Note: For efficient processing use cell references to identify individual formula parameters. However, if literal values are k eyed in the entry boxes, they must be placed in double quotes ("). Hint: Shortcut for selecting cell references: On the Formula Assistant panel, select the desired field. Press the Control Key. The Formula Assistant panel becomes transparent and is shifted up. On the worksheet, select the desired cell. Press the Control Key or click the Expand button. This system returns the selected cell to the field. Hint: If necessary, use F4 to lock either the row and/or column value of the cell reference. Global Software, Inc.

52 44 3. Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Some fields on the Formula Assistant - GXL panel will vary based upon the selected ledger; however, basic processing is the same for all ledgers. Use the table as an overview for entering data on the Formula Assistant GXL panel. Links are available at the bottom of the table to access ledger specific GXL information. Field Description GXL: Returns a single balance from the ledger (see GXL Formula for Account Values). Note: This section assumes that the parameters will be laid out top down in a single column. Therefore, when entering a cell reference in the first field and moving to the next field, the system will populate the other fields sequentially thru the Period field. Key 1 This header and field value will vary based upon requirements for the selected ledger. Ex: Oracle - Key 1 = Balance Type Key 2 This header and field value will vary based upon requirements for the selected ledger. Ex: Oracle - Key 2 = Budget/En Type Year Specify the reporting year. Format Specify the time range for which to retrieve data. Basic valid formats are PER, QTR, YTD, LTD, and RANGE; however, some ledgers may have other valid formats. Period Specify the corresponding period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e. 1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format. Key 3 Data These headers and field values will vary based upon requirements for the selected ledger. If selected, the corresponding option and associated value is included in the formula. Ex: Oracle - Key 3 Data = Currency, Translated, Ledger (a.k.a. Book), Translated Flag, and Summary Accts Invert Sign If selected, the account balance sign displayed is reversed. Account Segments: Specify the cells containing the required account segments. This area assumes that the account segments will be on a row next to each other, so entering a value and clicking the down arrow will populate the rest of the fields (i.e. first account segment cell reference is A13, then clicking the down arrow for the parameter populates the following fields with B13, C13, etc.). Use the following links to access ledger specific GXL information: Analyst Data Warehouse Jack Henry 20/20 Oracle BPCS 4.05 Designer GL JD Edwards PeopleSoft BPCS 6.02 Infinium Lawson SAP BPCS 6.04 Jack Henry Silverlake Movex

53 GL Reporting Use the table to enter data on the Formula Assistant - GXE panel. Note: Optionally use Formula Part 2 to add a second GXE calculation in a single GXE formula, thus allowing for both account and journal details to be expanded from one GXE formula. Field Description GXE: Fills detail balances into the specified worksheet (see Expand to Account Balances and Expand to Journals). Source Worksheet Specify the name of the worksheet that contains the summary formulas that will be expanded. Target Worksheet Specify the name of the new or existing worksheet that contains the final formatted worksheet and will receive the expanded detail. Source Detail Row Specify the row number in the source worksheet that contains the summary formulas. Target Table, Range, or Row Specify the target table, range name, or first row on the target worksheet to begin inserting the expanded detail. Headings Specify whether or not to include column headings when expanding details. If not specified, N (No) is assumed. Autofit Specify whether or not to autofit columns when expanding details. If not specified, N (No) is assumed. Global Software, Inc.

54 46 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Field Description Clear Sheet Specify whether or not to clear the target worksheet before expanding details. If not specified, N (No) is assumed. Note: This value MUST be N when a TABLE or RANGE is specified for the Target Table/Range/Row parameter. Journals Only Column Specify the column for which to generate journal detail (see Expand to Journals). Note: This function is not applicable for Analyst ledgers. Journals Ad Hoc Query If desired, specify the ad hoc query to be used to generate journal detail. Note: This function is not applicable for Analyst ledgers. An ad hoc query is required to expand journal detail for Data Warehouse and Designer GL ledgers. Summarize Balance Level If desired, specify the account segment number (break level) to be used for summarizing data when expanding account balances. Ex: Account String = Company, Department, Account, Sub-Account. To summarize balances at the account level enter '3' (third account segment). In addition for JDE ledgers only, if desired specify field alias or field name (as defined in the Configurator) for an AcctCatCode or BUCatCode to control how to group expanded data. This replicates the legacy SSJDE GXECC formula. Total Journal Level If desired, specify the account segment number for which to generate subtotals when expanding journal entry details. Subtotals are generated at the selected level and each previous level. Ex: Account String = Company, Department, Account, Sub-Account. Enter a '3' (third account segment) to generate subtotals at the account, department, company and grand total level. Note: This function is not applicable for Analyst, Data Warehouse, or Designer GL ledgers. For SAP ledgers the maximum allowable segment number for totaling is '4'. If a segment level greater than the number of segments allowed by the ledger is entered, the system will use the maximum allowable number of segments. Note: For JDE ledgers only, when the Summarize Balance Level is an AcctCatCode or field alias or field name then an 'extra' account segment representing the category code is added to the front of the account string. This will need to be tak en into consideration when specifying the account segment number for which to generate subtotals. Convert Journals to Table Click the down arrow and select whether or not to place expanded journal entry details into a table. When this option is utilized, the system creates a new table on the specified target worksheet and assigns the next available standard Excel table name. The table includes headers and grand totals, except when a journals ad hoc query is used. This option is ignored if the specified Target is a range or table, or if Total Journal Level is not blank. If not specified, N (No) is assumed. Note: This function is not applicable for Analyst ledgers.

55 GL Reporting Use the table to enter data on the Formula Assistant - GXC panel. Note: This panel is hidden when ad hoc processing is disabled via a setting in the Configurator. Field Description GXC: Used to specify the values for a customized formula. Contact Global for configuration of the new formula. Query Click the down arrow and select the custom ad hoc query to be used for the customized formula. Parm Specify the appropriate parameters for the customized formula. Field values will vary based upon the requirements for the customized formula. Global Software, Inc.

56 48 6. Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Fields on the Formula Assistant - GXD panel will vary based upon the selected ledger; however, basic processing is the same for all ledgers. Use the table as an overview for entering data on the Formula Assistant - GXD panel. Links are available at the bottom of the table to access ledger specific GXD information. Field Description GXD: Displays the description for an account segment or account string. Parms These headers and field values will vary based upon requirements for the selected ledger. Ex: Oracle - Parms = Segment Num, Value and Ledger. Account Segments: May or may not be applicable for the GXD formula. Use the following links to access ledger specific GXD information: 7. Analyst Data Warehouse Jack Henry 20/20 Oracle BPCS 4.05 Designer GL (N/A) JD Edwards PeopleSoft BPCS 6.02 Infinium Lawson (N/A) SAP BPCS 6.04 Jack Henry Silverlake Movex The Results Box near the bottom left of the panel displays the formula as it is being built. Verify the data in the Results Box is correct, and then click one of the following toolbar icons or buttons. Insert (icon) or Insert (button) -- inserts the formula to the previously selected cell on the current worksheet and closes the panel. Copy (icon) -- copies the formula to the Windows clipboard. Cancel (button) -- closes the panel.

57 GL Reporting GXL Formula for Account Values Use the GXL formula to retrieve account balances for a specific format/reporting period. Parameters in the GXL formula will vary based upon the selected ledger; however, basic processing is the same for all ledgers. Use the following as an overview for the GXL formula. Links are available at the bottom to access ledger specific GXL information. Syntax: =GXL("Key 1","Key 2","Key 3","Year","Format","Period","Account Segment 1","Account Segment 2","Account Segment 3","Account Segment 4","Account Segment 5"...) Note: It is most common to use cell references within GXL formulas to identify parameters. Parameters: Key 1 Value will vary based upon requirements for the selected ledger. Ex: Oracle - Key 1 = Balance Type. Key 2 Value will vary based upon requirements for the selected ledger. Ex: Oracle - Key 2 = Budget/En Type. Key 3 Literals and values will vary based upon requirements for the selected ledger. If more than one variable needs to be defined, separate the variables by a semi-colon. Enter 0 or leave blank if not used. Ex: Oracle - Key 3 = Translated, Currency, Ledger (a.k.a. Book), and Summary Accts. Year Year identifier. Format Basic valid formats are listed below; however, some ledgers may have other valid formats: PER Activity for a selected period or range of periods QTR Activity for the periods included in the selected quarter number YTD Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number excluding the opening balance LTD Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number including the opening balance RANGE Activity for a range of periods specified Period Corresponds to period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e. 1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format. Account Segment 1 - nn Enter one parameter for each segment of the account number. The number of account segments will vary based upon the account structure for the selected ledger. May be a single value, mask, range, value list, segment list, hierarchy value field (see Account Segment Syntax). Use the following links to access ledger specific GXL information: Analyst Data Warehouse Jack Henry 20/20 Oracle BPCS 4.05 Designer GL JD Edwards PeopleSoft BPCS 6.02 Infinium Lawson SAP BPCS 6.04 Jack Henry Silverlake Movex Global Software, Inc.

58 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Account Segment Syntax For parameters that allow a single value, mask, range, value list, segment list, hierarchy value (a.k.a. parent group) field syntax examples are listed below: Criteria Type Syntax Results Single Value 8000 Retrieves value 8000 Mask (wildcard) 85* -or- 85** (see Note) Retrieves values starting with 85 Mask (wildcard) for All Values * Retrieves all values Mask (wildcard) for a Single Value 8*00 -or- 8_00 Retrieves values 8x00, where x is any character (i.e. 8100, 8200, 8300,...) Range Retrieves values 8000 thru 8599 Blank Values (Infinium and JDE ledgers only) BLANK Retrieves all blank values. Non Blank Values (Infinium and JDE NOTBLANK ledgers only) Retrieves all non blank values. Note: JDE ledgers are case sensitive when specifying characters for a segment value. SAP ledgers must use 85** syntax -- one asterisk (*) for each digit/character being masked. Value List: A list of values may be entered for an account segment. The list of values may include single values, a range of values, a mask (wildcard) value, segment lists, hierarchy fields, or an excluded value (indicated by inserting '/' prior to the value). Enclose the value list in square brackets [ ] and use a comma (,) to separate values in the list. Criteria Type Syntax Results Value List - Single Values [8000,8250,8370] Retrieves values 8000, 8250 and 8370 Value List - Range & Single Value [ ,8750] Retrieves values 8000 thru 8599, and 8750 Value List - Range & Exclude Value [ ,/8375] Retrieves values 8000 thru 8599, excluding 8375 Segment Lists and Hierarchy Values: Criteria Type Syntax Results Segment List ^CASH Retrieves all values in CASH segment list Hierarchy Value ^^1234 Retrieves all values in group 1234 Note: SAP ledgers use a single caret (^) to identify SAP master data hierarchy sets and a double caret (^^) to identify other SAP set names (i.e. TCODE GS01 sets). If a master data hierarchy set and segment list are assigned the same name, the calculation uses the hierarchy Fields: The syntax for field (where aaa is the alias or field name (as defined in the Configurator), and bbb is the field value). The field value specified may be a single value, mask, range, value list, or segment list. field may be used alone or embedded in a bracketed value list. Criteria Type Syntax Field - Single Retrieves myfield value Field - using a Value Retrieves myfield value 2000 and Field - in a Value List [100,@myfield:2000,600] Retrieves value 100 or 600 or myfield value 2000 Note: If necessary, may enter table qualifier (syntax

59 GL Reporting Click the link to go to a related topic: Create/Maintain Segment Lists and Locate Segment. Global Software, Inc. 51

60 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 List Accounts for a GXL Formula This feature allows for listing account numbers which will be used in the calculation of a GXL formula. Note: This function is not applicable for Designer GL ledgers. 1. Select the desired cell that contains the GXL formula in question, then from the SServer menu select List Accounts -or- right click and select Spreadsheet Server>List Accounts. The List Accounts window appears. 2. Review the accounts listed in the grid to ensure the formula is retrieving the appropriate accounts. 3. To modify the list of accounts being displayed on the List Accounts window, alter the value in the Filter field and click the List Accounts button. Note: Modifying the filter does not change the account segment values in the spreadsheet cell being referenced by the GXL formula. Click the link to go to a related topic: List Accounts, General Grid Features or Copy/Export Records.

61 GL Reporting Expand/Collapse Row for a GXL Formula The Expand GL Row feature allows the user to expand the balances for GXLs on a single row or for all GXLs on the worksheet into individual account details. This process is similar to the GXE formula, but expands into additional rows on the current worksheet instead of to another designated workbook location. A maximum of 80 columns may be expanded. The detail rows may expand up or down based upon an option in the user's settings. Note: For the Expand option to function properly, all parameters must be in a column and at least one account segment must be on the row, and a description field should follow the last account segment on the row -or- a blank column should exist between the last account segment and the GXL formula. When the original GXL contains field, the expanded rows display the appropriate account segment and field value; however, calculated amounts may be overstated and may not foot to the original GXL calculated amount. To Expand a Single GL Row: 1. On the desired row to be expanded, select any cell containing a GXL formula, then right click and select Spreadsheet Server>Expand GL Row -or- select the ribbon equivalent (see SS Ribbon). The system adds additional rows to the spreadsheet listing the account details for the selected GXL(s). The expanded data appears in blue italics. Global Software, Inc.

62 54 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 To Expand All GL Rows: 1. Select any cell on the worksheet and from the SS ribbon click the Expand GL Row down arrow and then select Expand All GL Rows. The system adds additional rows to the spreadsheet listing the account details for all GXLs on the worksheet. The expanded data appears in blue italics. To Collapse GL Rows for a Single Expansion: 1. Select any cell within the expanded rows section, then right click and select Spreadsheet Server>Collapse GL Row -or- select the ribbon equivalent (see SS Ribbon). The system removes the expanded GL rows in the selected section. To Collapse GL Rows for All Expansions on the Worksheet: 1. Select any cell on the worksheet and from the SS ribbon click the Collapse GL Row down arrow and then select Collapse All GL Rows (Worksheet). The system removes all expanded GL rows on the worksheet. To Collapse GL Rows for All Expansions in the Workbook: 1. Select any cell on the worksheet and from the SS ribbon click the Collapse GL Row down arrow and then select Collapse All GL Rows (Workbook). The system removes all expanded GL rows in the workbook.

63 GL Reporting Locate Segment The Locate Segment function is used to display a list of valid account segment fields (as defined in the Configurator), or hierarchy values (a.k.a. parent groups) for each account segment, and to enable the user to insert a selected value to the current active cell in Excel. fields and ledger specific hierarchy values may be used in a GXL formula by replacing any of the account segment values with the field or hierarchy value. field or hierarchy value may be used alone or embedded in a bracketed value list. The syntax for field (where aaa is the alias or field name, and bbb is the field value), or if necessary may enter a table qualifier (syntax The field value specified may be a single value, mask, range, value list, or segment list. Insert two carets symbols (^^) prior to the hierarchy value in the formula for the system to recognize the hierarchy value. 1. Select the cell to contain the segment value, right click and select Spreadsheet Server>Locate Segment. The Locate A Segment panel appears. Nav Tip: This step may be replaced by selecting a cell and selecting the menu or ribbon equivalent (see SServer Menu or SS Ribbon). Note: The first time the Locate Segment function is accessed the system loads and caches VSegments. A message and progress bar appear indicating that this process may tak e a few moments. 2. To toggle between displaying a list of segment fields, or hierarchy values, select the Fields, or Hierarchy radio button. Note: For Data Warehouse and SAP ledgers, the Value and Hierarchy options are not applicable. For Designer GL ledgers, the Hierarchy option is disabled when HSegments are not preloaded. Global Software, Inc.

64 56 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M To filter for segment values or hierarchy values for a specific segment, select the desired segment(s) in the Include Segments list. The system displays only the segment or hierarchy values for the selected segment(s). This feature does not apply when fields. 4. To filter the segment fields, or hierarchy values in the grid, enter the selection criteria into the appropriate column filter field. Alphanumeric fields filter character by character. 5. To re-sort a column in ascending order, click the column heading. To re-sort a column in descending order, click the column heading a second time. 6. To copy the list of values currently displayed in the list, click the Copy Segment Lists to Clipboard toolbar icon. 7. To insert a value to the current cell process one of the following: For a Value or Hierarchy: Double click the desired value in the list -or- select the value and click the Insert button. The value is inserted and the panel closes. Select the desired value in the list and click the Insert to Current Cell toolbar icon. The value is inserted and the panel remains open. For Field: Key the appropriate value (may be a single value, mask, range, value list or segment list), double click the desired alias in the list -or- select the alias and click the Insert button. The alias and assigned value is inserted and the panel closes. Key the appropriate value (may be a single value, mask, range, value list or segment list), select the alias and click the Insert to Current Cell toolbar icon. The alias and assigned value is inserted and the panel remains open.

65 GL Reporting 7.8 Spreadsheet Server Segment Lists Create/Maintain Segment Lists 57 Spreadsheet Server Segment Lists are used to create a hierarchy of individual segments which can be used in a GXL formula. A segment list may be used in a GXL formula by replacing any of the account segment values with the desired segment list name. A caret symbol (^) must be inserted prior to the segment list name in the formula for the system to recognize the segment list. A user's ability to create/maintain segment lists is determined by a parameter setting defined in User settings in the Configurator. To Create a New Segment List: 1. In Excel from the toolbar or ribbon, select Segment Lists (see SS Toolbar or SS Ribbon). The Segment List Maintenance panel appears. Nav Tip: This panel may also be accessed by selecting the Segment Lists button on the Control Panel - GL Balances or Query tabs -or- by selecting the Maintain Segment Lists button on the Settings - General panel. 2. To create a new segment list, enter a segment list name (no blank spaces or special characters), description, and optional user-defined group name, then click the Add List toolbar icon ( Segment List grid. Global Software, Inc. ). The segment list is added to the

66 58 3. Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Use the table to enter data in the Segment List Value section on the Segment List Maintenance panel. Field Description And/Or Specify the transition logic between the values or groups, thus indicating whether or not the values in the grouping must meet both criteria (AND) or only meet one criteria (OR) to be included in the segment list. Note: The And/Or selection criteria is ignored for the first list value. Group Specify an ID number for grouping different lines in the list together. The value defaults to Field Alias If desired, click the down arrow and select the alias, for field as defined in the Configurator, to be used in the segment list. Comparison Click the down arrow and select the operation to be applied to the value. Valid values are Between, Equal, Like, Not Between, Not Equal and Not Like. Use Between and Not Between when specifying a range, and Like and Not Like when using a mask (wildcard). Note: The system modifies the comparison value based upon the criteria entered in the Value field. Note: May not exclude (i.e. Not Equal) a segment list. Value Specify the value for the criteria. The value may be a segment value, mask (wildcard), range, existing segment list (nesting), full or partial account string, category code, user field value or field value. Note: For JDE ledgers only, the literals BLANK and NONBLANK are valid values. 4. Click the Add Value icon ( ). The value criteria is added to the Segment List Value grid. 5. Once the segment list is complete, click X. The panel closes. To Maintain an Existing Segment List: 1. In Excel from the toolbar or ribbon, select Segment Lists (see SS Toolbar or SS Ribbon). The Segment List Maintenance panel appears. Nav Tip: This panel may also be accessed by selecting the Segment Lists button on the Control Panel - GL Balances or Query tabs -or- the Maintain Segment Lists button on the Settings - General panel. 2. To sort the segment lists or segment list values in the grid, click on the desired column header. To re-sort in descending order, click the desired column header a second time. 3. To filter the segment lists or segment list values in the grid, enter the selection criteria into the appropriate column filter field. Alphanumeric fields filter character by character. 4. To modify an existing segment list, select the list and key over the description, group name and/or update the segment list values as necessary. 5. To move a segment list value up or down in the grid, select the list, then select the value and click the appropriate Up or Down arrow icon ( 6. or ). To remove a segment list value, select the list, then select the value in the grid and click the Remove Value icon ( ).

67 GL Reporting To copy a segment list, select the list and click the Copy List toolbar icon ( ). The Copy Segment List panel appears. Enter the name to be assigned to the new segment list and click OK. 8. To delete a segment list, select the list and click the Remove List toolbar icon ( 9. To paste a segment list(s) to the active cell on the spreadsheet, select the desired segment lists(s): ). To select a single segment list -- select the list and click the Insert List toolbar icon ( ). To select multiple segment lists -- press and hold the Ctrl key as lists are selected on the grid rows, and then click the Insert List toolbar icon ( ). To select multiple segment lists in a range -- select the first list in the range, press and hold the Shift key, and select the last list in the range, and then click the Insert List toolbar icon ( ). Note: If the active cell already contains a value, then the newly selected segment list(s) is added and the values in the active cell are formatted into a value list. If the active cell contains a mask (i.e. *), then the newly selected segment list(s) replaces the previous mask. 10. To copy all segment lists (name, description, group name and values) to the clipboard, click the Copy Lists toolbar icon ( ). The data may then be pasted into Excel, Notepad, Word, etc. for review and/or printing. 11. To lock a segment list, select the list and click the Lock toolbar icon ( ). The Password dialog box appears. Enter the desired password and click OK. Locking the segment list allows other users to access the segment list but prevents changes from being made. 12. To unlock a segment list, select the list and click the Unlock toolbar icon ( appears. Enter a valid password and click OK. ). The Password dialog box Note: In the event the individual required passwords are lost or forgotten, contact your administrator for the override password. 13. To unlock all segment lists, click the Unlock All toolbar icon ( override password and click OK. ). The Password dialog box appears. Enter the 14. To purge balances in the cache file for a segment list, select the list and click the Purge List from Cache toolbar icon ( ). This action may be used when using local cache mode if a segment list is deleted or if list values are altered. 15. To import segment lists from an ad hoc, Excel spreadsheet or a segment list.mdb file, click the Import Lists toolbar icon ( ). The Segment List Import panel appears. Select the appropriate source: Ad Hoc -- click the down arrow and select the appropriate ad hoc, and then click Import. Excel -- specify the starting cell and click the down arrow and select the worksheet from which to import, and then click Import. SegmentList.mdb -- click the ellipse button to browse and select the desired.mdb from which to import, and then click Import. Messages appear displaying the segment lists being imported and confirming when the import is complete. Click Close to close the panel. Note: When importing from an ad hoc or Excel spreadsheet, follow the supported format guidelines listed at the top of the Results window. Global Software, Inc.

68 60 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M To perform a mass clean up of the segment list.mdb file based upon filter criteria, click the Cleanup Lists Database toolbar icon ( ). This function is password protected. Contact Global for more information. 17. To display a list fields, click the Field Aliases toolbar icon ( Configurator, appears. ). A list fields, as defined in the

69 GL Reporting Using Segment Lists or Hierarchy Values in a GXL Formula A segment list or hierarchy value (a.k.a. parent group, set, etc.) may be used in a GXL formula by replacing any of the account segment values with the desired segment list or hierarchy value name. Insert a single caret symbol (^) prior to the segment list name in the formula. Note: For Infinium ledgers, the system supports the SSInfinium legacy process of inserting an at symbol (@) prior to a user list segment list name in the formula; however, a caret symbol may be used instead of an at symbol. Insert two carets symbols (^^) prior to the hierarchy value in the formula. Note: In the event a hierarchy value and segment list are assigned the same name -AND- a single caret (^) is used, the calculation will be based upon the hierarchy value instead of the segment list. Note: It is most common to use cell references within GXL formulas to identify parameters. Formula Example - Using a Segment List: =GXL("A",,"TRANSLATED="E";"&"CURRENCY="USD";","2003","PER","6","01","*","^MiscExp","*"."*") Retrieves actual activity for period 6 of 2003 for all accounts included in the segment list MiscExp. Formula Example - Using a Segment List for a User List (Infinium Ledgers Only): Note: A segment list referencing user field values may be used in conjunction with account segment parameters (see Infinium GXL). =GXL ("M","Actuals","LIBRARY=";"CURRENCY=USD";"ANDUSERLIST=@Tax","2002","YTD","11","001","310","6*","*") Retrieves actual monetary year-to-date activity thru period 11 for accounts beginning with 6 which also meet the user field criteria in the TAX segment list. Global Software, Inc.

70 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 SSLDESC Formula Use the SSLDESC formula to retrieve the description for a segment list. Syntax: =SSLDESC("Segment List") Note: It is most common to use cell references within SSLDESC formulas to identify parameters. Formula Example: =SSLDESC("^MiscExp") Retrieves the segment list description for the MiscExp segment list.

71 GL Reporting View or Modify Segment List Values from within Excel Spreadsheet Server allows a user to view from a worksheet, the values contained in a specific segment list. The user may also modify the values "on the fly". Lists can be shared among all Spreadsheet Server users so caution should be exercised when making modifications. 1. Select the desired cell that contains the segment list in question, then from the SServer menu select List Accounts -or- right click and select Spreadsheet Server>List Accounts. The Segment List Maintenance panel appears displaying the values for the selected segment list (see Create/Maintain Segment Lists). 2. Segment list values may be added or removed as necessary. 3. In the event values for the segment list were altered, it is suggested to purge the balances in the cache file for the segment list. To purge balances, Click the Purge List from Cache toolbar icon ( ). 4. Once all modifications have been made, click X. The panel closes and returns focus to the spreadsheet. 5. In the event balances were purged in the cache file for the segment list, the GXL formula -or- the local cache will need to be manually recalculated (see Calculation Options or View/Refresh Local Cache). Global Software, Inc.

72 64 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M Calculations Calculation Options Multiple options are available for retrieving and calculating data within Spreadsheet Server. 1. By default, the calculation function within Excel is set to calculate automatically. Global strongly recommends setting this value to manual so that all required spreadsheet changes or additions can be completed prior to recalculating. Nav Tip: For Excel 2003, this setting is found on the Calculation tab within Excel's Tools>Options menu. Nav Tip: For Excel 2007 (and above), this setting is found in the Calculation Options section on the Excel's Options Formulas panel. Click the Office button. The Office Menu panel appears. Click the Excel Options button. The Excel Options panel appears. Select Formulas. The Excel Options Formula panel appears. 2. The following options are available for calculating spreadsheets: F2+Enter Calculates the active cell. F9 Calculates all worksheets in all open workbooks. Shift+F9 Calculates the active worksheet. Ctrl+Alt+F9 Calculates all worksheets in all open workbooks, regardless of whether they have changed since the last calculation. Nav Tip: The majority of these options are also available by selecting the ribbon equivalent (see SS Ribbon).

73 GL Reporting View/Refresh Local Cache When spreadsheets are calculated, Spreadsheet Server stores the account balances in the either the local or global cache database (based upon an option in the user's settings). Spreadsheet Server looks first at the cache for account balances prior to retrieving the information from the host. As a result, it may be necessary to clear and recalculate the cache file when any of the following occur: Data has changed on the host system since the prior calculation. A segment list has changed since the prior calculation. The accounts profile has changed since the prior calculation. To View/Refresh Local Cache: 1. In Excel from the SServer menu, select View Cache -or- select the ribbon equivalent (see SS Ribbon). The Local Cache panel appears displaying cached records. 2. To refresh the account balances during an Excel session, the cache records should be cleared. To clear all records in the cache -- click the Clear All button. To clear selected records -- select the desired records in the grid and click the Clear Selected Rows button. To clear cache for a selected worksheet -- click the down arrow and select the desired worksheet, and then click the Clear Selected Sheet button. 3. After the cache records have been cleared, the system assigns a default Recalculation Option. If necessary, click the down arrow and select a different recalculation option. Value options are: Trigger Excel to automatically recalculate the entire workbook after closing the Local Cache panel. Trigger Excel to automatically recalculate the entire worksheet after closing the Local Cache panel. Do not trigger Excel to recalculate the after closing the Local Cache panel. 4. To automatically trigger the Local Cache refresh, in Excel from the SServer menu select Clear Cache and Recalculate. Nav Tip: This refresh may also be launched by pressing Shift+Ctrl+R -or- by selecting the toolbar or ribbon equivalent (see SS Toolbar or SS Ribbon). Click the link to go to a related topic: General Grid Features or Copy/Export Records. Global Software, Inc.

74 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 View/Refresh Global Cache Two Global Cache cache types are available and require additional component(s) to be installed. Global Cache -- the Global SmartCache component must be installed on a web server or a server running Internet Information Services (IIS). Global Cache with Redis Technology -- both a Redis database and the Global SmartCache WRT component must be installed on a server. When GXL or GEXQ formulas are submitted to cache for calculation the system returns the value "Pending" as calculations occur. When items are pending the Cache icon on the ribbon is red, and when all items are completed the Cache icon is green. Pending items may be automatically refreshed in the workbook based upon an option in the user's settings. To View/Refresh Global Cache: 1. In Excel from the SServer menu, select View Cache -or- select the ribbon equivalent (see SS Ribbon). The Global Cache panel appears displaying cached records. 2. To view the cache records that are pending, in progress, completed or failed select accordingly: To view completed records in the cache -- click the View Completed button. To view currently caching records -- select the View In-Process button. To view pending cache records -- select the View Pending button. To view failed cache records -- select the View Errors button. 3. To refresh the account balances during an Excel session, the cache records should be cleared. To clear all records in the cache -- click the Clear Cache button. To clear selected records -- select the desired records in the grid and click the Clear Selected Rows button. To clear cache for a selected worksheet -- click the down arrow and select the desired worksheet, and then click the Clear Selected Sheet button. 4. After the cache records have been cleared, the system assigns a default recalculation option. If necessary, click the down arrow and select a different recalculation option. Value options are: Trigger Excel to recalculate workbook after closing Global Cache. Trigger Excel to recalculate worksheet after closing Global Cache. Do Not Trigger Excel to recalculate after closing Global Cache.

75 GL Reporting To automatically trigger the Global Cache refresh, in Excel from the SServer menu select Recalculate. Nav Tip: This refresh may also be launched by pressing Shift+Ctrl+R -or- by selecting the toolbar or ribbon equivalent (see SS Toolbar or SS Ribbon). Click the link to go to a related topic: General Grid Features. Global Software, Inc.

76 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Disable/Enable Formula Calculations Disabling calculations will effectively halt the various Spreadsheet Server formula calculations when Excel calculates spreadsheets. As a result of disabling calculations, GXD and GEXQ formulas will return <SS Not Connected> values and GXL formulas will return zero values. When disabled, Spreadsheet Server does not communicate to the Host. Disabling Spreadsheet Server formula calculations can be extremely useful when: Discontinuing calculation of a complex or long-running spreadsheet. Press Shift+Ctrl+Z to quickly disable formula calculations. A workbook is inadvertently opened whose calculation option is set to automatic. Press Shift+Ctrl+Z to quickly disable formula calculations. Creating a new worksheet or modifying an existing worksheet by adding columns and/or rows with Spreadsheet Server formulas, and switching a format to/from the range type period. In Excel from the SServer menu, select Disable Spreadsheet Server -or- select the SS toolbar or ribbon equivalent (see SS Toolbar or SS Ribbon). To Enable Formula Calculations: 1. In Excel from the SServer Disabled menu, select Start Spreadsheet Server -or- select the ribbon equivalent (see SS Ribbon). The appropriate Login or Sign On dialog box appears based upon the selected ledger. Note: For Data Warehouse and most Designer GL ledgers, no dialog box appears. 2. Enter the appropriate data on the Login or Sign On dialog box, and then click Login or OK. Note: When unattended (auto) sign on is activated, step 2 is not applicable. Use the following links to access ledger specific sign on information: Analyst Data Warehouse Jack Henry 20/20 Oracle BPCS 4.05 Designer GL JD Edwards PeopleSoft BPCS 6.02 Infinium Lawson SAP BPCS 6.04 Jack Henry Silverlake Movex

77 GL Reporting 7.10 Drill Down Functionality General Grid Features 69 Drill down panels in Spreadsheet Server offer the following features. Some of these basic grid features are also available in other functions (i.e. List Accounts, Local Cache, Execute Query). Feature Description Ad Hoc Drill Down To drill down from a predefined drill down panel (i.e. Account Balances, Journals, etc.) to data retrieved by an ad hoc query, select the desired record(s) in the grid, right click and select Ad Hoc Drill Down. Then from the Ad Hoc Drill Down sub-menu select the query to be used for drilling down (see Drill Down to Selected Ad Hoc). The Ad Hoc Drill Down option is only available when the user is licensed to the General Ledger feature, ad hoc processing is allowed (a Configurator security setting), and ad hoc queries exist for the predefined drill down level. Sub Queries To drill down from one drill down grid to data retrieved by a user-defined query, select the desired record(s) in the grid, right click and select Sub Queries. Then from the Sub Queries sub-menu, select the query to be used for drilling down. The Sub Queries option is only available when the user is licensed to the Query or Query Designer feature, and sub queries exist for the drill down (see Sub Query Column). Display SQL Statement To display the execution time and SQL statement run for the current drill down tab/panel, click the information button ( ). Re-sort Columns To re-sort a column in ascending order, click the column heading. To re-sort a column in descending order, click the column heading a second time. Autosize Columns To automatically resize column widths in a grid to the maximum length required for the header and/or data, right click and select Autosize. Re-size/Hide Columns To re-size or hide a column, click and hold the left or right edge of the column header and drag to the desired width. Move Columns To move a column, click and hold the column header and drag to the desired location. Copy To copy records to the Windows clipboard, select the desired record(s) in the grid, right click and select Copy to Clipboard (see Copy/Export Records). Dynamic Column Groupings To selectively group records and summarize amount columns by any column, drag the column heading into the summary section of the panel. To display detail records associated with a grouping, click the '+' next to the desired grouping level. Click the '-' to collapse the expanded view. Multiple levels of summary may be created. Global Software, Inc.

78 70 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Feature Description Filter Row To filter data in the grid, enter the desired value in the appropriate column filter field. Alphanumeric fields filter character by character. Numeric fields filter upon entry of the full field value. Options Fly Out Use the Options fly out window to specify exporting options, to create and maintain custom Window grid layouts, and to control grouping and subtotaling options. The Options fly out window may be pinned to remain open. Export: Select All To select all rows in the grid, select Select All. Copy/Export To copy or export the drill down/query results data, select the desired rows in the grid, and then select the the appropriate copy/export function (see Copy/Export Records). Grid Layouts: List Box By default the basic grid layout is displayed. Alternate layouts may be created and applied at a later time, or set as the default. Displays the name of the layout currently being used. Click the down arrow and select the layout to be applied to the grid.

79 GL Reporting Feature 71 Description AutoSize To automatically re-size columns widths in a grid to the maximum length required for the header and/or data, select AutoSize Column Headers. Save Current Layout To save the current grid layout, click Save Current Layout. If the layout is new, then specify the name to be assigned to the new layout and click OK. Save Current Layout As To save the current grid layout as a new layout, select Save Current Layout As. Specify the name to be assigned to the new layout and click OK. Remove Layout From List To remove a layout, click the down arrow and select the layout to be removed, and then select Remove Layout From List. Use Default To apply the default layout to the grid, select Use Default. Note: This feature only applies to the ResultsContainer grid panel. Set Layout as To set a default layout to be used for the drill down level and/or query, click the down arrow and Default select the desired layout, and then select Set Layout as Default. Note: Currently this feature only applies to Sub Query drill down and ResultsContainer grid panels. Groups and Subtotals: To apply subtotals to grouped data, select the check box next to the desired column header description(s). To remove a subtotal, clear the check box for the desired column. Note: Only numerical fields are allowed for subtotaling. Expand All To expand all grouped data in the grid (thus showing all detail records within all groups), click the Expand All button. Collapse All To collapse all grouped data in the grid (thus showing only group levels), click the Collapse All button. Sum Footers To display totals for numeric columns at the bottom of the drill down panel, select the Sum Footers check box. Click the link to go to a related topic: List Accounts, List Accounts for a GXL Formula, View/Refresh Local Cache, or Execute Query. Global Software, Inc.

80 72 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M Copy/Export Records Spreadsheet Server allows for copying or exporting records from various panels (i.e. drill down, List Accounts, Local Cache, ResultsContainer). Copying and/or exporting options may vary slightly for different functions; however, basic processing is the same. 1. From the drill down or List Accounts grid, select the desired record(s): To copy/export a single record -- select the desired record. To copy/export select multiple records -- press and hold the Ctrl key as records are selected on the grid rows. To copy/export multiple records in a range -- select the first record in the range, press and hold the Shift key, and select the last record in the range. To copy/export all records in the grid -- right click and select Select All -or- on the Options fly out window select Select All. 2. Right click and select the appropriate copy/export function -or- on the Options fly out window, select the appropriate copy/export function. Copy to Clipboard -- places data on Windows clipboard. Copy to Clipboard w/headings -- places data including headings on Windows clipboard. Copy to Excel (Simple) -- displays the Copy into Excel panel. See step 3. Export to CSV, PDF, RTF, or Excel (Full Format) -- brings up Windows Explorer panel. Export to Excel -- displays the Copy into Excel panel. See step On the Copy into Excel panel, specify the following processing criteria: Include Headings -- if selected, column headings are included in the copy. Select the appropriate radio button to indicate whether to copy to a worksheet, range or table destination. When copying to a worksheet, enter the starting cell in which to place the data and the target worksheet (new or existing). When copying to a range or table, click the down arrow to select select the desired range or table. 4. Click OK to copy the data onto the worksheet. Click the link to go to a related topic: List Accounts, List Accounts for a GXL Formula, View/Refresh Local Cache, or Execute Query.

81 GL Reporting Drill Down to Detailed Account Balances Spreadsheet Server allows drilling down from an amount on the spreadsheet to see what account balances make up the value. The drill down results can appear in a single panel, tabbed panel or worksheet, and exclude zero balance accounts based upon options in the user's settings. 1. Select a cell containing a GXL formula, then right click and select Spreadsheet Server>Drill Down. The Account Balances drill down appears showing the balance for each individual account. Nav Tip: This panel may also be accessed by selecting a cell and then selecting the menu, toolbar or ribbon equivalent (see SServer Menu, SS Toolbar or SS Ribbon). Nav Tip: The drill down data may also be pushed directly to a work sheet by selecting the ribbon equivalent (see SS Ribbon). Global Software, Inc.

82 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Drill Down to Summarized Account Balances Spreadsheet Server allows drilling down from an amount on the spreadsheet to see what account balances make up the value. Summary drill down functionality allows the user to select which account segments to use for grouping or summarizing the accounts when displaying the account balances which make up the value. The drill down results can appear in a single panel or tabbed panel, exclude zero balance accounts, and display or omit the Summary Drill Down prompt panel based upon options in the user's settings. 1. Select a cell containing a GXL formula, then right click and select Spreadsheet Server>Summary Drill Down -orselect the ribbon equivalent (see SS Ribbon). The Summary Drill Down panel appears listing account segments based upon the GXL formula and defaulting selections based upon the last time the function was used. Nav Tip: This panel may be by-passed based upon an option setting in the user's setting or by selecting the ribbon equivalent (see SS Ribbon). 2. On the Summary Drill Down panel, select the account segments to be used for summarizing. 3. Click OK. The Summary Drill Down appears showing the balance for each detail account summarized based upon the account segments selected on the previous panel (i.e. company, department, account in the example below). Note: The Journal List for Selected/All Accounts and Ad Hoc Drill Down options are not available from the Summary Drill Down panel.

83 GL Reporting Drill Down to Multi-Column Account Balances Spreadsheet Server allows drilling down from multiple cells on the same row on a spreadsheet to see what account balances make up the values. A maximum of 80 columns may be selected. The drill down results can appear in a single panel, tabbed panel or worksheet, and exclude zero balance accounts based upon options in the user's settings. 1. Select multiple cells on the same row containing GXL formulas, then right click and select Spreadsheet Server>Drill Down. The Multiple Account Balances drill down appears showing detail account balances for each column. If only two columns were selected, a variance column will automatically be displayed. Nav Tip: This panel may also be accessed by selecting multiple cells and then selecting the menu, toolbar or ribbon equivalent (see SServer Menu, SS Toolbar or SS Ribbon). Nav Tip: The drill down data may also be pushed directly to a work sheet by selecting the ribbon equivalent (see SS Ribbon). Global Software, Inc.

84 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Drill Down to Journals per Account(s) Spreadsheet Server allows drilling down to journals from detail account balances or directly from a GXL formula. The drill down results can appear in a single panel or tabbed panel based upon options in the user's settings or appear on a worksheet based upon the method used to execute the function. Note: Drill down to journals displays YTD journals when the specified Format is LTD. This function is not applicable for Analyst, Data Warehouse and Designer GL ledgers. For older versions of Infinium ledgers where the TXPJNO field does not exist, ensure that the exclude option is selected in the Configurator for the Infinium host configuration. To Drill Down to Journals from Detail Account Balances: 1. From the Account Balances drill down, select the desired account(s): To select a single account -- double click the account. The Journals drill down appears displaying journals for the selected account. To select multiple accounts -- press and hold the Ctrl key as accounts are selected on the grid rows, and then right click and select Journal List for Selected Accounts. The Journals drill down appears displaying journals for all the selected accounts. To select multiple accounts in a range -- select the first account in the range, press and hold the Shift key and select the last account in the range, and then right click and select Journal List for Selected Accounts. The Journals drill down appears displaying journals for all the selected accounts. To select all accounts in the grid -- right click and select Journal List for All Accounts. The Journals drill down appears displaying journals for all accounts. From the Multiple Account Balances drill down, select the desired account(s): To select a single account/period -- double click the desired account, specify the desired column number and click OK -or- double click the desired amount. The Journals drill down appears displaying journals for the selected account/period. Note: To select multiple accounts, see above for basic processing steps.

85 GL Reporting For BPCS 6+ users only, click the Analysis Fields button to populate the analysis fields on the current panel. Warning: Response time will vary based upon the size of the journal detail file on the host system. To Drill Down to Journals from a GXL Formula on a Worksheet: 1. Select a cell containing a GXL formula, then from the SS ribbon, click Drill Down>Drill Down>Worksheet>GL Journals. The system pushes the drill down journal results for all accounts associated with the GXL formula to a worksheet. Global Software, Inc.

86 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Drill Down to Journal Entry Lines Spreadsheet Server allows drilling down from journals to the journal entry lines which make up the journal (batch). The drill down results can appear in a single panel or tabbed panel based upon options in the user's settings. Note: This function only applies to BPCS, Infinium, JDE, and Movex ledgers. For BPCS ledgers, an option in the user's settings controls a user's authority to this function. For Infinium and JDE ledgers, user settings in the Configurator control a user's authority to this function. 1. From the Journals drill down, double click the desired journal -or- select the desired journal, right click and select Display All Lines of Selected Journal. The Journal Entry Lines drill down appears displaying all the entry lines for the journal. 2. For BPCS 6+ users only, click the Analysis Fields button to populate the analysis fields on the current panel. Warning: Response time will vary based upon the size of the journal detail file on the host system.

87 GL Reporting Drill Down to Detail Journal Entry Lines Spreadsheet Server allows drilling down from journals to the detail journal entry lines which make up the journal. The drill down results can appear in a single panel or tabbed panel based upon options in the user's settings. Note: This function only applies to BPCS ledgers. 1. From the Journals drill down, select the desired journal, right click and select View Detail Journal Lines. The Journal Entry Lines drill down appears displaying detail journal entry lines for the journal. 2. For BPCS 6+ users only, click the Analysis Fields button to populate the analysis fields on the current panel. Warning: Response time will vary based upon the size of the journal detail file on the host system. Global Software, Inc.

88 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Drill Down to Subsystem Detail Spreadsheet Server allows drilling down from journals to the subsystem detail which make up the journal. The drill down results can appear in a single panel or tabbed panel based upon options in the user's settings. Note: This function only applies to Infinium, JDE, and Movex ledgers. 1. From the Journals drill down, select the desired journal, right click and select View Subsystem Detail. The Sub System Lines drill down appears displaying subsystem details for the journal.

89 GL Reporting Drill Down to Selected Ad Hoc Spreadsheet Server allows drilling down from a predefined drill down panel or directly from a GXL formula to an ad hoc query. The drill down results can appear in a single panel or tabbed panel based upon options in the user's settings, or appear on a worksheet based upon the method used to execute the function. The Ad Hoc Drill Down option is only available when the user is licensed to the General Ledger feature, ad hoc processing is allowed (a Configurator security setting), and ad hoc queries exist for the predefined drill down level. Note: When processing an ad hoc query drill down, the list of available ad hoc queries is controlled by the Filter by GL option on the Settings - Ad Hoc Queries panel (see SS Settings). To Drill Down to a Selected Ad Hoc from a Drill Down Panel: 1. From the predefined drill down panel, select the desired record(s) in the grid: To select a single record -- click the record. To select multiple records -- press and hold the Ctrl key as records are selected on the grid rows. To select multiple records in a range -- select the first record in the range, press and hold the Shift key and select the last record in the range. To select all records in the grid -- right click and select Select All. 2. Right click and select Ad Hoc Drill Down. Then from the Ad Hoc Drill Down sub-menu select the query to be used for drilling down. The system displays the appropriate Ad Hoc Drill Down panel. To Drill Down to a Selected Ad Hoc from a GXL Formula on a Worksheet: 1. Select a cell containing a GXL formula, then from the SS ribbon, click Drill Down>Drill Down>Worksheet>GL Journals>Prompt. The Select an Ad Hoc Query panel appears. 2. Select the query to be used for drilling down and click OK. The system pushes the drill down results for all accounts associated with the GXL formula to a worksheet. Global Software, Inc.

90 82 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M Miscellaneous Features List Accounts Spreadsheet Server enables the user to generate a list of existing accounts. Filtering is available to control which accounts are listed. Note: This function is not applicable for Designer GL ledgers. 1. In Excel from the SServer menu select List Accounts -or- right click and select Spreadsheet Server>List Accounts. The List Accounts panel appears. 2. On the List Accounts panel, specify the desired criteria (fields vary based upon selected ledger) and filter for which accounts to display, and then click the List Accounts button. The appropriate accounts are displayed on the List Accounts panel. If the filter is left blank, the system will retrieve all account masters. When using a filter, a valid account string combination should be used. In addition, the filter can include masks, ranges, and/or segment lists. Click the link to go to a related topic: List Accounts for a GXL Formula, General Grid Features or Copy/Export Records.

91 GL Reporting Account Security An Accounts Profile allows an administrator to control the account strings that a particular user may access. An Accounts Profile may be set up via the Maintain Accounts Profile button (see instructions below) or via the Configurator. If Override User Account Profile values are assigned to the user in the Configurator, then the Maintain Accounts Profile function is only used to display, not maintain, the Accounts Profile. Note: This feature is not applicable for Infinium, JDE or Oracle ledgers. Refer to the Oracle Database Security Notes section in the Configurator User Manual for Oracle security processing. 1. In Excel from the SServer menu, select Settings. The Settings - General panel appears. Nav Tip: This panel may also be accessed by selecting the Settings tab on the Control Panel -or- by selecting the toolbar or ribbon equivalent (see SS Toolbar or SS Ribbon). 2. Select GL Reporting on the navigation pane. The Settings - GL Reporting panel appears. 3. Click the Maintain Accounts Profile button. The Accounts Profile panel appears. Nav Tip: This panel may also be accessed by selecting Accounts Profile from the ribbon on the Control Panel GL Balances tab. 4. Click the Segment Labels down arrow and select the ledger or Designer GL definition for which to display account segments. 5. In the Account Mask fields on the Accounts Profile panel, specify the account string to which the user will have access and click the Add button. Single account values, masks, ranges, value lists and segment lists. When using a segment list, the segment list may not include "excluded" values. A maximum of 20 different account strings is allowed per profile. 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all account masks for the account profile have been added. Global Software, Inc.

92 84 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M To remove an account mask from the list, select the value in the list and click the Remove button. To remove all account masks from the list, click the Clear All button. 8. To lock the account profile for security purposes (i.e. prevent others from making changes to the account profile), click the Lock icon button. The Password dialog box appears. Enter the desired password and click OK. This password is required to change the account profile. It is not mandatory to lock an account profile. 9. To unlock the account profile, click the Unlock icon button. The Password dialog box appears. Enter the valid password and click OK. Note: In the event the individual password is lost or forgotten, contact your administrator for the override password. 10. When the account profile is complete, click the Close button.

93 GL Reporting SS Validation Spreadsheet Server gives the user the ability to create a validation list in a specific cell in Excel. Validation lists are drop down lists that allow the user to choose from a valid list of options/field values. 1. Select a cell to hold the validation list, then right click and select Spreadsheet Server>Validation. The Data Validation panel displays. The available types of data on the panel vary based upon the selected ledger. Nav Tip: This step may be replaced by selecting a cell and selecting the toolbar or ribbon equivalent (see SS Toolbar or SS Ribbon). 2. Select the type of data for which to build a list or enter valid values separated by a comma in the Custom field, and click OK to push validation to the current cell. Note: Validation Lists are limited by Excel to 255 characters. 3. On the Excel worksheet when the appropriate cell is selected, a drop down button appears indicating that valid values exist for the cell. Click on the drop down arrow button to display the Validation List. 4. Click on the desired value. The system returns the selected value to the appropriate cell. 5. To maintain valid values for a cell, select the cell and from the Excel menu, select Data>Validation -or- from the Ribbon select Data>Data Tools>Data Validation. The Data Validation panel appears. Refer to Excel Help for additional instructions. Global Software, Inc.

94 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Generate Account Detail for Current Sheet The Generate Account Detail option allows the user to create an audit trail which lists the individual accounts and balances included in the GXL formulas of the worksheet. 1. In Excel from the SServer menu, select Generate Account Detail for Current Sheet -or- select the ribbon equivalent (see SS Ribbon). The Generate Account Detail Options panel appears. 2. On the Generate Account Detail Options panel, specify the following processing criteria: Source Worksheet Input - Column - Identify the column within the worksheet that contains the report line description. This description is used as the first column in the extracted audit trail. Source Worksheet Input - Row - Identify the first row containing a GXL formula to be used in generating the detail. This will set the starting point for the extracted audit trail. Target Options - Indicate whether to copy the selected records to the standard Windows clipboard or to paste data directly to a target worksheet in the spreadsheet. When pasting directly to a worksheet, a starting cell into which to place the data and a target worksheet (new or existing) must be specified. 3. Click OK. An audit trail showing the line description, all included accounts, and their balances will be generated.

95 GL Reporting Expand Detail Reports (GXE) The Expand Detail option allows the user to select a single or multiple financial statement lines using GXL formulas and expand the line(s) into the individual account details, similar to the Generate Account Detail option. This process is primarily used to launch detailed financial statements into the same template. This option can be used for multiple departments to ensure consistency for each report. Instead of creating each possible account number as different rows in the spreadsheet, a single line can be created that contains ranges, segment lists, or wildcards. This line will then be expanded into the applicable individual accounts and placed into a formatted worksheet via table, range, or row. The maximum number of columns to be expanded is based upon an option in the user's settings. See Expand to Account Balances. Additionally, the Expand Detail option allows the user to create a detail journal voucher listing for a specific summary balance of accounts using the GXE formula. This process works similarly to the Expand Detail option for account detail, but uses additional parameters. See Expand to Journals. The GXE formula contains a Part 1 and Part 2. Both parts are identical. Optionally use Part 2 to add a second GXE calculation in a single GXE formula, thus allowing for both account and journal details to be expanded from one GXE formula. Global Software, Inc.

96 88 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M Expand to Account Balances 1. Create a standard Spreadsheet Server report for the GXL formula using Build a Template (see Build a Template). The single report line becomes the basis for the expanded report. When the process is executed the single line will be expanded into individual account lines and placed into the final formatted worksheet (see below). Note: The maximum number of columns to be expanded is based upon an option in the user's settings. The example below shows a report based on an account mask. GXL formulas are created in a single line. In the example, the account string parameters are shown in cells B9:B13. The balance parameters of the GXL (i.e. type, budget name, year, format, period, translated, currency) are entered in each column heading (B1:C7). The actual GXL formulas are contained in cells B16 and C16. Standard Excel formula is used to calculate the variance in cell D16. Various literals are entered in cells E16:K16. This designation will generate the associated value into that particular column. Valid literals are ACCTNUM (account number), ACCTDESC (account description), and ACCTSEGnn (where nn equals the account segment number, such as 01, 02, 03, etc). Note: The GXE also supports legacy SSInfinium user field literals (UF01, UF02, UF03 and UF04), in addition to legacy SSJDE account (i.e. ACCTCO, ACCTBU, ACCTOBJ, etc.) and category code (CATCODE, CATDESC) literals. 2. Using Build a Template (see Build a Template) for the GXE formula, define the starting column and row and parameters for the formula. Field Description Example Starting Column Specify the starting column for the template. A Starting Row Specify the starting row for the template. 18

97 GL Reporting 89 Field Description Example Source Worksheet Specify the name of the worksheet that contains the summary formulas that will be expanded. GXE Source Target Worksheet Specify the name of the worksheet that contains the final formatted worksheet and will receive the expanded detail. GXE Target Source Detail Row Specify the row number in the source worksheet that contains the summary formulas. 16 Target Table, Range, Specify the target table, range name, or first row on the target or Row worksheet to begin inserting the expanded detail. Note: When using a target range, identify the Excel range as all cells under the columns headers. In the example, Range1 is for cells A5 thru J5. Range1 Headings Enter Y or N to indicate whether or not to include column headings when expanding details. If not specified, N (No) is assumed. N Autofit Enter Y or N to indicate whether or not to autofit columns when expanding details. If not specified, N (No) is assumed. N Clear Sheet Enter Y or N to indicate whether or not to clear the target worksheet before expanding details. If not specified, N (No) is assumed. Note: This value MUST be N when a TABLE or RANGE is specified for the Target Table/Range/Row parameter. N Journals Only Column Not applicable when using the GXE to expand account detail. (leave blank) Journals Ad Hoc Query Not applicable when using the GXE to expand account detail. (leave blank) Summarize Balance If desired, specify the account segment number (break level) to be Level used for summarizing data when expanding account balances. 4 In addition for JDE ledgers only, if desired specify field alias or field name (as defined in the Configurator) for an AcctCatCode or BUCatCode to control how to group expanded data. 3. Total Journal Level Not applicable when using the GXE to expand account detail. (leave blank) Convert Journals to Table Not applicable when using the GXE to expand account detail. (leave blank) After the GXE data has been entered and verified, click the Insert icon or button. The parameters and GXE formula are inserted to the selected worksheet (see the sample spreadsheet above). Formula Example: =GXE(B20,B19,B22,B21,B23,B24,B25,B26,B27,B28,B29,B30) 4. Format the Target Worksheet with headings in rows 1-3, blank rows in rows 4-6, and totals in row 7. Set each total to a range of rows 4-6 (i.e. =SUM(B4:B6)). When the Expand Detail Reports function is initiated, the total line is shifted down or up, based upon the number of data rows populated each time the expansion is processed. Global Software, Inc.

98 90 5. Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 To generate detail reports for all GXE formulas in the workbook, in Excel from the SServer menu select Generate All Detail Reports (GXE) -or- press Shift+Ctrl+E -or- select the ribbon equivalent (see SS Ribbon). The results for all GXE formulas are expanded into the appropriate formatted sheets. To generate a detail report for a single GXE formula, select the cell containing the GXE formula, right click and select Spreadsheet Server>Generate This Detail Report (GXE) -or- select the ribbon equivalent (see SS Ribbon). The results for the selected GXE formula are expanded into the appropriate formatted sheet.

99 GL Reporting Expand to Journals Note: The GXE expand to journals feature is not applicable for Analyst ledgers. 1. Create a standard Spreadsheet Server report for the GXL formula using Build a Template (see Build a Template). The single balance becomes the basis for the journal entry detail. When the process is executed the single column balance will be expanded into detail journal lines and placed into the target worksheet (see below). The example below shows a GXL formula totaling on an account mask. In the example, the account string parameters are shown in cells B10:B14. The balance parameters of the GXL (i.e. type, budget name, year, format, period, translated, currency) are entered in the cells B1:B7. The actual GXL formula is contained in cell B Using Build a Template (see Build a Template) for the GXE formula, define the starting column and row and parameters for the formula. Field Description Example Starting Column Specify the starting column for the template. A Starting Row Specify the starting row for the template. 19 Global Software, Inc.

100 92 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Field Description Source Worksheet Specify the name of the worksheet that contains the summary formulas that will be expanded. GXE Source Target Worksheet Specify the name of the worksheet that contains the final formatted worksheet and will receive the expanded detail. GXE Target Source Detail Row Specify the row number in the source worksheet that contains the summary formulas. 17 Target Table, Range, Specify the target table, range name, or first row on the target or Row worksheet to begin inserting the expanded detail. 1 Headings Enter Y or N to indicate whether or not to include column headings when expanding details. If not specified, N (No) is assumed. Y Autofit Enter Y or N to indicate whether or not to autofit columns when expanding details. If not specified, N (No) is assumed. Y Clear Sheet Enter Y or N to indicate whether or not to clear the target worksheet before expanding details. If not specified, N (No) is assumed. Y Journals Only Column Specify the column containing the GXL balance for which to generate journal detail. B Journals Ad Hoc Query If desired, identify the ad hoc query to be used to generate journal detail. Note: An ad hoc query is required to expand journal detail for Data Warehouse and Designer GL ledgers. Summarize Balance For JDE ledgers only, if desired specify field alias or field name Level (as defined in the Configurator) for an AcctCatCode or BUCatCode to control how to group expanded data. Otherwise field is not applicable when using the GXE to expand journal detail. (leave blank) Total Journal Level If desired, specify the account segment number for which to generate 4 subtotals when expanding journal entry details. Subtotals are generated at the selected level and each previous level. Note: This function is not applicable for Data Warehouse or Designer GL ledgers. For SAP ledgers the maximum allowable segment number for totaling is '4'. If a segment level greater than the number of segments allowed by the ledger is entered, the system will use the maximum allowable number of segments. Note: For JDE ledgers only, when the Summarize Balance Level is an AcctCatCode or field alias or field name then an 'extra' account segment representing the category code is added to the front of the account string. This will need to be tak en into consideration when specifying the account segment number for which to generate subtotals. Convert Journals to Table If desired, click the down arrow and select whether or not to place N expanded journal entry details into a table. When this option is used, the system creates a new table on the specified target worksheet and assigns the next available standard Excel table name. The table includes headers and grand totals, except when a journals ad hoc query is used. This option is ignored if the specified Target is a range or table, or if Total Journal Level is not blank. If not specified, N (No) is assumed.

101 GL Reporting After the GXE data has been entered and verified, click the Insert icon or button. The parameters and GXE formula are inserted to the selected worksheet (see the sample spreadsheet above). Formula Example: =GXE(B20,B19,B22,B21,B23,B24,B25,B26,B27,B28,B29,B30) 4. To generate detail reports for all GXE formulas in the workbook, in Excel from the SServer menu select Generate All Detail Reports (GXE) -or- press Shift+Ctrl+E -or- select the ribbon equivalent (see SS Ribbon). The results for all GXE formulas are expanded into the appropriate formatted sheets. To generate a detail report for a single GXE formula, select the cell containing the GXE formula, right click and select Spreadsheet Server>Generate This Detail Report (GXE) -or- select the ribbon equivalent (see SS Ribbon). The results for the selected GXE formula are expanded into the appropriate formatted sheet. Global Software, Inc.

102 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Hide Rows with Zero Balances The Hide Rows with Zero Balances function will analyze the active workbook or worksheet and perform a row hide function for any spreadsheet row that contains GXL formulas in which the net result is zero for all cells. This function is very effective for standardized reporting templates such as departmental reports. Multiple rows can be created as a template but the function can then hide non-used or zero rows. To Hide Rows with Zero Balances in the Workbook: 1. In Excel from the SServer menu, select Hide Rows with Zero Balances -or- select the SS toolbar or ribbon equivalent (see SS Toolbar or SS Ribbon). To Hide Rows with Zero Balances on the Worksheet: 1. In Excel from the SS ribbon, click the Hide Rows down arrow and then select Hide Zero Balance Rows (Worksheet). To Restore Hidden Rows in the Workbook: 1. In Excel from the SServer menu, select Restore Hidden Rows -or- select the SS toolbar or ribbon equivalent (see SS Toolbar or SS Ribbon). To Restore Hidden Rows on the Worksheet: 1. In Excel from the SS ribbon, click the Restore Rows down arrow and then select Restore Hidden Rows (Worksheet).

103 GL Reporting Reset Host Server Connection Spreadsheet Server allows the user to switch from one host server to another without having to close and restart Excel. 1. In Excel from the SServer menu, select Disable Spreadsheet Server -or- select the toolbar or ribbon equivalent (see SS Toolbar or SS Ribbon). 2. In Excel from the SServer Disabled menu, select Start Spreadsheet Server -or- select the ribbon equivalent (see SS Ribbon). The appropriate Login or Sign On dialog box appears based upon the selected ledger. Note: For Data Warehouse and Designer GL ledgers, no dialog box appears. 3. Enter the appropriate data on the Login or Sign On dialog box, and then click Login or OK. Note: When unattended (auto) sign on is activated, step 3 is not applicable. Use the following links to access ledger specific sign on information: Analyst Data Warehouse Jack Henry 20/20 Oracle BPCS 4.05 Designer GL JD Edwards PeopleSoft BPCS 6.02 Infinium Lawson SAP BPCS 6.04 Jack Henry Silverlake Movex Global Software, Inc.

104 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 SS View Log During all processing, various logging information is recorded. If the Settings option Enhanced Logging is selected, then the system records additional error message logging data. Log entries may be viewed, copied or ed. 1. In Excel from the SServer menu, select Settings. The Settings - General panel appears. Nav Tip: This panel may also be accessed by selecting the Settings tab on the Control Panel -or- by selecting the toolbar or ribbon equivalent (see SS Toolbar or SS Ribbon). 2. On the General panel, click the View Log button. The Log Viewer panel appears displaying the level, date, time and description for each log entry. In addition, in the bottom right hand corner the panel displays a count of the number of entries listed. Nav Tip: Steps 1 and 2 may be replaced by selecting the ribbon equivalent (see SS Ribbon). Note: To select a different time format or font size, click the respective drop down arrow in the bottom right hand corner. 3. To copy selected records to the clipboard, on the Log Viewer panel first select the desired record(s) and then either click the Copy Selected Errors button -or- right click on the list and select Copy Selected Errors on the popup panel: To copy a single record -- select the desired record. To copy select multiple records -- press and hold the Ctrl key as records are selected in the list. To copy multiple records in a range -- select the first record in the range, press and hold the Shift key, and select the last record in the range.

105 GL Reporting To the entire log file to the helpdesk, click the Error Log button. The system opens a new Outlook panel with the log file attached. Modify the address and/or text of the body as necessary and click the Send button. Note: When ing the log via the View Log button from the Settings function, system information is automatically added to the body of the To filter the entries in the log file, select the desired message type(s), date/time range, containing text, class and/ or method in the Filter section. The system displays only entries matching the selection criteria. Click the Clear Filter button to reset all filter fields to their default value. 6. To search for a specific value in the log file, key the desired value in the Find What field and click the Find Next button. The system highlights the first log entry containing the value. Click the Find Next button again, to find the next occurrence of the selected value. 7. To clear the log file, click the Clear Log button. 8. To display the full details of a log entry, double click the selected entry in the list. The Error Properties panel appears. Use the arrow buttons on the Error Properties panel to scroll up or down through the log entries in the list. To copy detail data for a single log entry to the clipboard, click the Copy button. Click the Close button to return to the Log Viewer panel. 9. To exit the Log Viewer panel, click the Close button. Global Software, Inc.

106 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Upgrade Segment List The Upgrade Segment List function is used to convert pre-v14 Spreadsheet Server segment lists to the revised V14 segment list file format. A user's ability to upgrade/maintain segment lists is determined by a parameter setting defined in User settings in the Configurator. Note: If the segment list has not been converted to the revised V14 format, then the user may be prompted to convert the segment list file during the install of V14, when starting Spreadsheet Server, or when accessing the Segment List function. To Upgrade the Segment List File: 1. From the desktop, click Start>Programs>Global Software Spreadsheet Server>Upgrade Segment List. The Upgrade Segment List panel appears. 2. Click OK. The system makes a backup of the segment list file, converts the file and displays message(s) indicating the results. Note: After the segment list upgrade process is complete, Global recommends reviewing all segment lists via the Segment List function.

107 GL Reporting Upgrade Workbook The Upgrade Workbook function is used to convert various legacy Spreadsheet Server and EDASH formulas in a workbook to revised Spreadsheet Server formulas. Legacy Formulas Revised Formulas Ledger(s) GXA, GXAB, GXU, FXA (see note) GXL BPCS, Infinium, JDE, Movex, select Designer GLs EXQ, EXD, EXI, EXS GEXQ, GEXD, GEXI, GEXS respectively not applicable Description formulas (i.e. GXD, BUDESC, CODESC) GXD Infinium, JDE Report formulas (i.e. GXE, GXECC) GXE Infinium, JDE GXSALES GXSALES JDE Note: Legacy JDE FXA formulas convert to JDE_FXA Designer GL GXL formulas. To Upgrade a Workbook: 1. Open the workbook containing the formula(s) to be converted, then from the SServer menu, select Upgrade Workbook -or- select the SS ribbon equivalent (see SS Ribbon). The Upgrade Workbook Options panel appears. The available options will vary based upon the selected ledger and the user's licensed features. 2. Select the desired formula(s) to be converted, then click Convert. The system makes a backup of the workbook, converts the formulas accordingly and displays message(s) indicating the results. Note: After converting legacy JDE FXA formulas assigned to multiple host configurations (i.e. SSFXA1, SSFXA2), manual intervention may be required to modify the Designer GL definition assigned to the GXL formulas. Global Software, Inc.

108 100 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M Analyst Analyst Sign On Follow the steps below to start the add-in component of Spreadsheet Server for an Analyst ledger. When user settings are set to start Spreadsheet Server during Excel startup, then step 2 is not applicable. When unattended (auto) signon is activated, steps 3 and 4 are not applicable. 1. Start Excel. 2. In Excel from the SServer Disabled menu, select Start Spreadsheet Server -or- select the SS ribbon equivalent (see SS Ribbon). The Sign On to Spreadsheet Server dialog box appears. 3. Various methods are available for signing onto Spreadsheet Server based upon the connection protocol being used: Options 1 - iseries or SQL Server: Host Name or IP Address - iseries system name or IP address that hosts the database Database Library - name of library or catalog containing the General Ledger data User Name - standard iseries or SQL Server sign on Password - standard iseries or SQL Server password Option 2 - Oracle Direct Connect: Select the Direct check box Specify the following fields: Host Name or IP Address - host or IP Address that hosts the database Service - Oracle Service Name indicating where the database is located Port - port number User Name - defaults the Application User Name assigned to the user in the Configurator Password - only required if a password was created for the user in the Configurator

109 GL Reporting 101 Option 3 - Oracle Client: Do not select the Direct check box Specify the following fields: Oracle Service Name - Service Name configured via the Oracle Net Manager User Name - defaults the Application User Name assigned to the user in the Configurator Password - only required if a password was created for the user in the Configurator 4. Click OK. Click the link to go to a related topic: Sign On, Control Panel, Disable/Enable Formula Calculations or Reset Host Server Connection. Global Software, Inc.

110 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Analyst Build a Template for GXL As fields on the Build a Template - GXL panel vary based upon the selected ledger, use the table to enter data unique for an Analyst ledger. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the Build a Template section to review generic processing fields. Field Description Data Type Click the down arrow and select the data type for which to retrieve data. Valid values are ACTUALAMT, ACTUALQTY, BUDGETAMT, and BUDGETQTY. Budget Name When Data Type is BUDGETAMT or BUDGETQTY, click the down arrow and select the budget name for which to retrieve data. Year Click the down arrow and select the reporting year. Format Click the down arrow and select the time range for which to retrieve data. Valid formats are PER, QTR, YTD, LTD, and RANGE. Period Click the down arrow and select the corresponding period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e. 1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format. Click the link to go to a related topic: Build a Template.

111 GL Reporting Analyst GXL Use the GXL formula to retrieve account balances for a specific format/reporting period. The following is an overview for the GXL formula for an Analyst ledger. Syntax: =GXL("Data Type","Budget Name","Key 3","Year","Format","Period","Account Segment 1","Account Segment 2","Account Segment 3","Account Segment 4","Account Segment 5"...) Note: It is most common to use cell references within GXL formulas to identify parameters. Parameters: Data Type Identifies the data type. Valid types are ACTUALAMT, ACTUALQTY, BUDGETAMT, and BUDGETQTY. Budget Name Identifies the budget name. This value is required when Data Type is BUDGETAMT or BUDGETQTY. Key 3 Currently not used. Enter 0. Year Year identifier. Format Format options are: PER Activity for the selected period QTR Activity for the periods included in the selected quarter number YTD Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number excluding the opening balance LTD Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number including the opening balance RANGE Activity for a range of periods specified Period Corresponds to period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e. 1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format. Account Segment 1-9 Enter one parameter for each segment of the account string (i.e. Company, GL Account, Department, Product, Sales Rep, Region, Customer Type, Budget Account, Employee). May be a single value, mask, range, value list, segment list, hierarchy value field (see Account Segment Syntax). Formula Example - Using a Mask: =GXL("ACTUALAMT","*","2004","PER","1","10","1*","*","*","*","*","*","*","*") Retrieves the actual activity for period 1 of 2004 with a mask for every GL account beginning with "1". Global Software, Inc.

112 104 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Click the link to go to a related topic: Control Panel, GL Reporting, Formula Assistant or GXL Formula for Account Values.

113 GL Reporting Analyst GXD For an Analyst ledger, the GXD formula is used to retrieve a description for a single account segment. Syntax: =GXD("Segment Num","Value") Note: It is most common to use cell references within GXD formulas to identify parameters. Parameters: Segment Num Identifies the segment number of the account string for which to retrieve the description. Value Identifies the value of the account segment for which to retrieve the description. Formula Example - Using a Single Segment: =GXD("2","1200") Retrieves the description for account segment 2 value Formula Example - Using Multiple Segments: =GXD("1","10")& "-" &GXD("2","1200") Retrieves the description for company segment 10 and concatenates the description for account segment Click the link to go to a related topic: GL Reporting or Formula Assistant. Global Software, Inc. 105

114 106 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M BPCS BPCS Sign On Follow the steps below to start the add-in component of Spreadsheet Server for a BPCS ledger. When user settings are set to start Spreadsheet Server during Excel startup, then step 2 is not applicable. When unattended (auto) signon is activated, steps 3 thru 5 are not applicable. 1. Start Excel. 2. In Excel from the SServer Disabled menu, select Start Spreadsheet Server -or- select the SS ribbon equivalent (see SS Ribbon). The Sign On to Spreadsheet Server dialog box appears. 3. On the Sign On dialog box specify the following information: Host Name or IP Address - iseries system name or IP address that hosts the database Database Library - name of library containing the General Ledger data User Name - standard iseries sign on Password - standard iseries password 4. Click OK. 5. For BPCS 6.02 users only, on the BPCS Chart of Accounts Name panel specify the name of the chart of accounts to be used and click OK. Click the link to go to a related topic: Sign On, Control Panel, Disable/Enable Formula Calculations or Reset Host Server Connection.

115 GL Reporting BPCS 4.05 Ledger Specifics Use the table to enter data on the Settings - Ledger Specifics - BPCS 4.05CD panel, or to access other functions. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the SS Settings section to review generic processing fields. Field Description BPCS 4.05CD Connection Options: Retrieve Account Balances If selected, Spreadsheet Server retrieves GL balances from the preloaded and Descriptions for Preloaded local PC database. Otherwise, the system retrieves balances from the Local PC Database host General Ledger system. Operate Completely Disconnected from Host When Retrieve Account Balances and Descriptions for Preloaded Local PC Database and this option are selected, the user works disconnected from the host system and is unable to drill down to journal entry detail. BPCS 4.05CD Library Options: Budget Library Specify the name of the library containing budget data. Budget File Name Specify the name of the file containing budget data. Library for RCOL01 Specify the name of the library containing the RCOL01 file. BPCS 4.05CD Processing Options: GXL: Include Opening Balance If selected, the GXL formula includes opening balances when calculating in YTD Format Calculations the YTD format. GXL/Drill Down: Include Consolidated Accounts If selected, the GXL formula and drill downs include consolidated accounts in the account balance. Drill Down: Allow Journal Lines If selected, drill down to journal lines is allowed. This function is password protected. List Accounts: Exclude Inactive Accounts Global Software, Inc. If selected, the List Accounts function excludes inactive accounts.

116 108 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Button Function Load Local PC Database Displays the Load Local PC Database panel, allowing the user to download account balances to a local database in order to optimize calculation speeds (see BPCS Load Local Data). Click the link to go to a related topic: SS Settings.

117 GL Reporting BPCS 6.02 Ledger Specifics Use the table to enter data on the Settings - Ledger Specifics - BPCS 6.02 panel, or to access other functions. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the SS Settings section to review generic processing fields. Field Description BPCS 6.02 Connection Options: Retrieve Account Balances and If selected, Spreadsheet Server retrieves GL balances from the preloaded Descriptions for Preloaded local PC database. Otherwise, the system retrieves balances from the Local PC Database host General Ledger system. Operate Completely Disconnected from Host When Retrieve Account Balances and Descriptions for Preloaded Local PC Database and this option are selected, the user works disconnected from the host system and is unable to drill down to journal entry detail. BPCS 6.02 Chart of Account Options: Default Chart of Accounts Click the down arrow and select the BPCS chart of accounts from which to retrieve data. Number of Segments in Account Structure Specify the number of segments in the account structure (i.e. Company, Division, etc.) and to be displayed in Spreadsheet Server. Global Software, Inc.

118 110 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Field Description Segments 1-14 Specify the title for each account segment in the account structure. These default based upon the chart of accounts selected, but may be changed if necessary. Account Segment Number Used for GXD Descriptions Specify the segment number to be used for retrieving account descriptions for GXD formulas and on the Account Balances drill down panel. BPCS 6.02 Processing Options: GXL: Include Opening Balance If selected, the GXL formula includes opening balances when calculating in YTD Format Calculations the YTD format. GXE: Display Analysis Data in If selected, Analysis Data fields are populated when expanding the GXE Journal Results formula for journals. When selected, response time will vary based upon the size of the journal detail file on the host system. List Accounts: Exclude Inactive Accounts If selected, the List Accounts function excludes inactive accounts. Journal Entry Drill Down: View Preference Click the down arrow and select the type of journal entries to display in the journal entry drill down panel. Valid values are Posted Entries Only, Unposted Entries Only, and Both Posted and Unposted. Button Function Load Local PC Database Displays the Load Local PC Database panel, allowing the user to download account balances to a local database in order to optimize calculation speeds (see BPCS Load Local Data). Refresh Clears the current segment descriptions and then retrieves them based upon the selected chart of accounts, and refreshes the list of available chart of accounts. Click the link to go to a related topic: SS Settings.

119 GL Reporting BPCS Ledger Specifics Use the table to enter data on the Settings - Ledger Specifics - BPCS panel, or to access other functions. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the SS Settings section to review generic processing fields. Field Description BPCS Connection Options: Retrieve Account Balances If selected, Spreadsheet Server retrieves GL balances from the preloaded and Descriptions for Preloaded local PC database. Otherwise, the system retrieves balances from the Local PC Database host General Ledger system. Operate Completely Disconnected from Host When Retrieve Account Balances and Descriptions for Preloaded Local PC Database and this option are selected, the user works disconnected from the host system and is unable to drill down to journal entry detail. BPCS Chart of Account Options: Default Chart of Accounts Click the down arrow and select the appropriate BPCS chart of accounts from which to retrieve data. Number of Segments in Account Structure Specify the number of segments in the account structure (i.e. Company, Division, etc.) and to be displayed in Spreadsheet Server. Segments 1-14 Specify the title for each account segment in the account structure. These default based upon the chart of accounts selected, but may be changed if necessary. Global Software, Inc.

120 112 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Field Description BPCS Processing Options: GXL: Include Opening Balance If selected, the GXL formula includes opening balances when calculating in YTD Format Calculations the YTD format. GXE: Display Analysis Data in If selected, Analysis Data fields are populated when expanding the GXE Journal Results formula for journals. When selected, response time will vary based upon the size of the journal detail file on the host system. List Accounts: Exclude Inactive Accounts If selected, the List Accounts function excludes inactive accounts. Journal Entry Drill Down: View Click the down arrow and select the type of journal entries to display in the Preference journal entry drill down panel. Valid values are Posted Entries Only, Unposted Entries Only, and Both Posted and Unposted. Button Function Load Local PC Database Displays the Load Local PC Database panel, allowing the user to download account balances to a local database in order to optimize calculation speeds (see BPCS Load Local Data). Refresh Clears the current segment descriptions and then retrieves them based upon the selected chart of accounts, and refreshes the list of available chart of accounts. Click the link to go to a related topic: SS Settings.

121 GL Reporting BPCS Build a Template for GXL As fields on the Build a Template - GXL panel vary based upon the selected ledger, use the table to enter data unique for a BPCS ledger. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the Build a Template section to review generic processing fields. Field Description Datagroup (Version 4.05) Specify the data type. Valid options are CURRENT, PRIOR, FUTURE, BUDGETA, BUDGETB, and CBnn (where nn is the budget number). Ledger (Version 6+) Specify the CEA ledger. Book (Version 6+) Specify the CEA book. Year (Version 6+) Click the down arrow and select the reporting year. Format Click the down arrow and select the time range for which to retrieve data. Valid formats are PER, QTR, YTD, LTD, RANGE, PERJ, QTRJ and YTDJ. Period Click the down arrow and select the corresponding period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e. 1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format. Click the link to go to a related topic: Build a Template. Global Software, Inc.

122 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 BPCS GXL Use the GXL formula to retrieve account balances for a specific format/reporting period. The following is an overview for the GXL formula for a BPCS ledger. Syntax - Version 4.05: =GXL("Datagroup","Format","Period","Account Segment 1","Account Segment 2","Account Segment 3") Syntax - Version 6+: =GXL("Ledger","Book","Key 3","Year","Format","Period","Account Segment 1","Account Segment 2","Account Segment 3","Account Segment 4","Account Segment 5"...) Note: It is most common to use cell references within GXL formulas to identify parameters. Parameters: Datagroup (Version 4.05) Identifies the data type. Valid options are CURRENT, PRIOR, FUTURE, BUDGETA, BUDGETB and CBnn (where nn equals the budget number). Ledger (Version 6+) Identifies the CEA ledger. Book (Version 6+) Identifies the CEA book. Key 3 Optionally identifies statistical data, alternate library and/or Budget Manager name/revision. Enter the necessary literal and a value as defined below. If more than one variable needs to be defined, separate the variables by a semi-colon. Enter 0 or leave blank if not used. Enter the literal "STAT=Y" to indicate retrieval of statistical balances. Enter the literal "LIBRARY=XXX" where XXX is the name of the alternate library to be used. If left blank, Spreadsheet Server uses the library specified during sign on. Enter the literal "BUDGET:NNNN:XX" where NNNN is the budget name and XX is the budget revision. Year (Version 6+) Year identifier. Format Format options are: PER Activity for the selected period QTR Activity for the periods included in the selected quarter number YTD Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number excluding or including the opening balance based upon an option on the Setting's Ledger Specifics panel LTD Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number including the opening balance RANGE Activity for a range of periods specified PERJ Period activity for the selected month, including unposted JVs QTRJ Activity for periods included in the selected quarter number, including unposted JVs YTDJ Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number excluding or including the opening balance based upon an option on the Setting's Ledger Specifics panel

123 GL Reporting 115 Period Corresponds to period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e. 1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format. Account Segment 1-14 Enter one parameter for each segment of the account string. The number of account segments will vary based upon the account structure for the selected ledger. May be a single value, mask, range, value list, segment list, hierarchy value field (see Account Segment Syntax). Formula Example - Version 6+ - Using Single Values: =GXL("JRH","JRH-E ACT","0","2001","PER","4","50","000","15130") Retrieves the monetary activity for period 4 of 2001 for a single account string. Formula Example - Version 6+ - Using a Mask and a Range: =GXL("JRH","JRH-E ACT","0","2001","PER","4","50","*"," ") Retrieves the monetary activity for period 4 of 2001 for all departments for the account range of thru Click the link to go to a related topic: Control Panel, GL Reporting, Formula Assistant or GXL Formula for Account Values. Global Software, Inc.

124 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 BPCS GXD For a BPCS ledger, the GXD formula is used to retrieve an account description for a single account string. For BPCS 6.02 ledgers, ledger specific settings in the user's settings determine the account segment used to retrieve the account description. Syntax - Version 4.05: =GXD("Account String") Syntax - Version 6+: =GXD("Account String","Ledger") Note: It is most common to use cell references within GXD formulas to identify parameters. Parameters: Account String Enter one parameter for each segment of the account string for which to retrieve the description. The number of account segments will vary based upon the account structure for the selected ledger. Ledger (Version 6+) Identifies the CEA ledger. Formula Example - Version 4.05: =GXD(" ") Retrieves the account description for the account string Formula Example - Version 6+: =GXD(" ","JRH") Retrieves the account description for the account string from the JRH ledger. Click the link to go to a related topic: GL Reporting or Formula Assistant.

125 GL Reporting BPCS 6+ GSV For a BPCS Version 6+ ledger only, the GSV formula is used to retrieve a segment description for any segment in the account string. Syntax - Version 6+: =GSV("Segment Value","Segment Name") Note: It is most common to use cell references within GSV formulas to identify parameters. Parameters: Segment Name The segment name represents the exact name of the segment within CEA. Formula Example: =GSV("540","DEPT") Retrieves the segment description for DEPT 540. Global Software, Inc.

126 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 BPCS GXA The GXA formula is a legacy formula used to retrieve account balances for a specific format/reporting period. The following is an overview for the GXA formula for a BPCS ledger. Note: The GXA formula has been retained for back wards compatibility with prior Spreadsheet Server releases. The GXL formula has been created to replace the GXA formula (see BPCS GXL). Use the Upgrade Work book function to convert GXA formulas to GXL formulas (see Upgrade Work book ). Syntax - Version 4.05: =GXA("Account String","Datagroup","Format","Period","Key 3") Syntax - Version 6+: =GXA("Account String","Ledger","Book","Year","Format","Period","Key 3") Note: It is most common to use cell references within GXA formulas to identify parameters. Parameters: Account String The account string represents the account segments delimited by a dash. The number of account segments will vary based upon the account structure for the selected ledger. May be a single value, mask, range, value list, or segment list (see Account Segment Syntax). Datagroup (Version 4.05) Identifies the data type. Valid options are CURRENT, PRIOR, FUTURE, BUDGETA, BUDGETB and CBnn (where nn equals the budget number). Ledger (Version 6+) Identifies the CEA ledger. Book (Version 6+) Identifies the CEA book. Year (Version 6+) Year identifier. Format Format options are: PER Activity for the selected period QTR Activity for the periods included in the selected quarter number YTD Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number excluding or including the opening balance based upon an option on the Setting's Ledger Specifics panel LTD Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number including the opening balance RANGE Activity for a range of periods specified PERJ Period activity for the selected month, including unposted JVs QTRJ Activity for periods included in the selected quarter number, including unposted JVs YTDJ Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number excluding or including the opening balance based upon an option on the Setting's Ledger Specifics panel

127 GL Reporting 119 Period Corresponds to period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e. 1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format. Key 3 Optionally identifies statistical data, alternate library and/or Budget Manager name/revision. Enter the necessary literal and a value as defined below. If more than one variable needs to be defined, separate the variables by a semi-colon. Enter leave blank if not used. Enter the literal "STAT" to indicate retrieval of statistical balances. Enter the literal "XXX" where XXX is the name of the alternate library to be used. If left blank, Spreadsheet Server uses the library specified during sign on. Enter the literal "BUDGET:NNNN:XX" where NNNN is the budget name and XX is the budget revision. Formula Example - Version 6+ - Using Single Values: =GXA(" ","JRH","JRH-E ACT","2001","PER","4") Retrieves the monetary balance for period 4 of 2001 for a single account string. Formula Example - Version 6+ - Using Statistics: =GXA("50-*-*","JRH","JRH-E ACT","2001","PER","4","STAT") Retrieves the statistics balances from the actual book within the JRH ledger for period 4 for an account mask. Formula Example - Version 6+ - Using Alternate Library Name: =GXA(" ","JRH","JRH-E ACT","2001","PER","4","BPCS") Retrieves the monetary balance for period 4 of 2001 for a single account from the alternate library, BPCS. Global Software, Inc.

128 120 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Formula Example - Version 6+ - Using Budget Manager: =GXA(" ","JRH","JRH-E ACT","2004" "PER","4","Budget:Fiscal2005:003") Retrieves the budget balance from budget Fiscal2005 revision 003, for period 4 of 2004 for a single account string.

129 GL Reporting BPCS Load Local Data For BPCS ledgers, the option exists to download account balance information into a local database, allowing for optimized calculation speeds. 1. In Excel from the SServer menu, select Settings. The Settings - General panel appears. Nav Tip: This panel may also be accessed by selecting the Settings tab on the Control Panel -or- by selecting the toolbar or ribbon equivalent (see SS Toolbar or SS Ribbon). 2. From the navigation pane under Ledger Specifics, select the appropriate BPCS ledger. The selected Settings Ledger Specifics panel appears. 3. On the Ledger Specifics panel, click the Load Local PC Database button. The Load Local PC Database panel appears. 4. The top portion of the panel identifies the location for the local database. This setting defaults from user settings but may be changed by clicking the Browse button and selecting a new location. 5. Select whether or not to include the chart of accounts and/or segment descriptions in the download. In addition, the middle portion of the panel displays the existing data in the database. Click the ledger to be downloaded. To make multiple selections, hold down the Ctrl key and click on the desired ledgers -or- to select all ledgers, click the Select All button. 6. Once selection is complete, click the Load BPCS Local Database button. The progress of the download displays on the bottom portion of the panel. To stop the download process, click the Stop Loading button. 7. When the download is complete, click OK. Global Software, Inc.

130 122 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M Data Warehouse Data Warehouse Sign On Follow the steps below to start the add-in component of Spreadsheet Server for a Data Warehouse ledger. Note: When user settings are set to start Spreadsheet Server during Excel startup, then step 2 is not applicable. 1. Start Excel. 2. In Excel from the SServer Disabled menu, select Start Spreadsheet Server -or- select the SS ribbon equivalent (see SS Ribbon) Click the link to go to a related topic: Sign On, Control Panel, Disable/Enable Formula Calculations or Reset Host Server Connection.

131 GL Reporting Data Warehouse Ledger Specifics Use the table to enter data on the Settings - Ledger Specifics - Data Warehouse panel, or to access other functions. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the SS Settings section to review generic processing fields. Field Description Data Warehouse Options: Current Profile Click the down arrow and select the Data Warehouse profile to load. Button Function Load Data Warehouse Displays the Load Data Warehouse From GL panel. Use this panel to load data into the Data Warehouse profile. Click the link to go to a related topic: SS Settings. Global Software, Inc.

132 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Data Warehouse Build a Template for GXL As fields on the Build a Template - GXL panel vary based upon the selected ledger, use the table to enter data unique for a Data Warehouse ledger. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the Build a Template section to review generic processing fields. Field Description Key 1 This header and field value will vary based upon requirements for the selected Data Warehouse profile. Ex: Balance Type Key 2 This header and field value will vary based upon requirements for the selected Data Warehouse profile. Ex: Organization Year Click the down arrow and select the reporting year. Format Click the down arrow and select the time range for which to retrieve data. Valid formats are PER, QTR, YTD, LTD, and RANGE. Period Click the down arrow and select the corresponding period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e. 1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format. Profile Click the down arrow and select the desired Data Warehouse profile. Click the link to go to a related topic: Build a Template.

133 GL Reporting Data Warehouse GXL Use the GXL formula to retrieve account balances for a specific format/reporting period. The following is an overview for the GXL formula for a Data Warehouse ledger. Syntax: =GXL("Key1","Key2","Year","Format","Period","Profile","Account Segment 1","Account Segment 2","Account Segment 3","Account Segment 4","Account Segment 5"...) Note: It is most common to use cell references within GXL formulas to identify parameters. Parameters: Key 1 Value entered for key 1 parameter will vary based upon the requirements for the selected Data Warehouse profile. Ex: Balance Type Key 2 Value entered for key 2 parameter will vary based upon the requirements for the selected Data Warehouse profile. Ex: Organization Year Year identifier. Format Format options are: PER Activity for the selected period QTR Activity for the periods included in the selected quarter number YTD Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number excluding the opening balance LTD Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number including the opening balance RANGE Activity for a range of periods specified Period Corresponds to period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e. 1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format. Profile Identifies the Data Warehouse profile. Account Segment 1 - nn Enter one parameter for each segment of the account string. The number of account segments will vary based upon the account structure for the selected Data Warehouse profile. May be a single value, mask, range, value list, segment list, hierarchy value field (see Account Segment Syntax). Formula Example - Using a Mask: =GXL("Actuals","ABC","2009","PER","1","SS_Sample","ABC","1*","*","*") Retrieves the actual activity for period 1 of 2009 with a mask for every account beginning with "1". Global Software, Inc.

134 126 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Click the link to go to a related topic: Control Panel, GL Reporting, Formula Assistant or GXL Formula for Account Values.

135 GL Reporting Data Warehouse GXD For a Data Warehouse ledger, the GXD formula is used to retrieve an account description for a single account string. Syntax: =GXD("Account Segment 1","Account Segment 2","Account Segment 3","Account Segment 4","Account Segment 5"...) Note: It is most common to use cell references within GXD formulas to identify parameters. Parameters: Account String Enter one parameter for each segment of the account string for which to retrieve the description. The number of account segments will vary based upon the account structure for the selected Data Warehouse profile. Formula Example: =GXD("ABC","115","00","01") Retrieves the account description for the account string ABC Click the link to go to a related topic: GL Reporting or Formula Assistant. Global Software, Inc.

136 128 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M Designer GL Designer GL Sign On Follow the steps below to start the add-in component of Spreadsheet Server for a Designer GL ledger. Note: When user settings are set to start Spreadsheet Server during Excel startup, then step 2 is not applicable. 1. Start Excel. 2. In Excel from the SServer Disabled menu, select Start Spreadsheet Server -or- select the SS ribbon equivalent (see SS Ribbon) Note: For most Designer GL ledgers, no dialog box appears. Click the link to go to a related topic: Sign On, Control Panel, Disable/Enable Formula Calculations or Reset Host Server Connection.

137 GL Reporting Designer GL Ledger Specifics Use the table to enter data on the Settings - Ledger Specifics - Designer GL panel, or to access other functions. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the SS Settings section to review generic processing fields. Field Description Designer GL Options: File Name Specify the Designer GL file name. Connection Name Click the down arrow and select the connection name. Right click and select Refresh to refresh the data. Key 1 Caption Specify the caption for key 1. Key 1 Data Validation Specify the values to be included in the Key 1 drop down list. Key 2 Caption Specify the caption for key 2. Key 2 Data Validation Specify the values to be included in the Key 2 drop down list. SQL TRIM Supported If selected, the TRIM function used in SQL to remove a specified prefix or suffix from a string is supported. Preload HSegments If selected, HSegment values are preloaded into cache when Spreadsheet Server is started. If not selected, the Hierarchy option in the Locate Segment function is disabled, as there are no values to display. Button Function Set Default Designer GL Opens Windows Explorer, allowing the user to browse to and select/set the default Designer GL without having to enter a password. Load Default GL Definition Loads the default Designer GL data on the panel. This function is password protected. Global Software, Inc.

138 130 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Button Function Browse for GL Definition Opens Windows Explorer, allowing the user to browse to and select a Designer GL. This function is password protected. Refresh Acct Key Sec Cache Refreshes the account segment security cache to process any changes made to ad hoc files. Note: The various Settings - Ledger Specifics - Designer GL - suboptions are used to maintain Designer GL definitions. These panels are password protected. Contact Global for more information. Click the link to go to a related topic: SS Settings.

139 GL Reporting Designer GL Build a Template for GXL As fields on the Build a Template - GXL panel vary based upon the selected ledger, use the table to enter data unique for a Designer GL ledger. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the Build a Template section to review generic processing fields. Field Description Key 1 Click the down arrow and select a value, or manually key a value (see note). The header and field value will vary based upon selected Designer GL requirements. Ex: APlus - Key 1 = Library Key 2 Click the down arrow and select a value, or manually key a value (see note). The header and field value will vary based upon selected Designer GL requirements. Ex: APlus - Key 2 = Balance Type Year Click the down arrow and select the reporting year. Format Click the down arrow and select the time range for which to retrieve data. Valid formats are PER, QTR, YTD, LTD, and RANGE. Period Click the down arrow and select the corresponding period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e. 1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format. Designer GL Defaults the value from Available Designer GL Definitions. Available Designer GL Definitions Click the down arrow and select a Designer GL Definition from which to retrieve data. After selecting a value, the system changes the parameters on the panel to match the selected definition. Note: The system does not verify that the value manually keyed is a valid value (i.e. contained in the drop down list). Click the link to go to a related topic: Build a Template. Global Software, Inc.

140 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Designer GL GXL Use the GXL formula to retrieve account balances for a specific format/reporting period. The following is an overview for the GXL formula for a Designer GL ledger. Note: The Designer GL definition for APlus is being used in the examples below. Syntax: =GXL("Key 1","Key 2","Key3","Year","Format","Period","Account Segment 1","Account Segment 2","Account Segment 3","Account Segment 4","Account Segment 5"...) Note: It is most common to use cell references within GXL formulas to identify parameters. Parameters: Key 1 Value entered for key 1 parameter will vary based upon the requirements for the selected Designer GL. Ex: APlus - Key 1 - Library Key 2 Value entered for key 2 parameter will vary based upon the requirements for the selected Designer GL. Ex: APlus - Key 2 = Balance Type Key 3 Identifies the Designer GL Definition. Year Year identifier. Format Format options are: PER Activity for the selected period QTR Activity for the periods included in the selected quarter number YTD Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number excluding the opening balance LTD Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number including the opening balance RANGE Activity for a range of periods specified Period Corresponds to period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e. 1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format. Account Segment 1 - nn Enter one parameter for each segment of the account string. The number of account segments will vary based upon the account structure for the selected ledger. May be a single value, mask, range, value list, segment list, hierarchy value field (see Account Segment Syntax). Note: For ASI Designer GLs ONLY, when the actual account segment value is '*' in the GL database, use '#' in the GXL formula instead of '*' for the account segment value. Formula Example - Using a Range: =GXL("APLUS","ACTUAL","CUSTOMGL="APLUS";","2007","PER","8","1","0000","0","8050","5010"," ") Retrieves the actual activity for period 8 of 2007 for a range of account codes 310 to 350.

141 GL Reporting 133 Formula Example - Using a Mask: =GXL("APLUS","ACTUAL","CUSTOMGL="APLUS";","2007","PER","8","1","0000","0","8*","5010","310") Retrieves the actual activity for period 8 of 2007 with a mask for every department beginning with "8". Click the link to go to a related topic: Control Panel, GL Reporting, Formula Assistant or GXL Formula for Account Values. Global Software, Inc.

142 134 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M Infinium Infinium Sign On Follow the steps below to start the add-in component of Spreadsheet Server for an Infinium ledger. When user settings are set to start Spreadsheet Server during Excel startup, then step 2 is not applicable. When unattended (auto) signon is activated, steps 3 and 4 are not applicable. 1. Start Excel. 2. In Excel from the SServer Disabled menu, select Start Spreadsheet Server -or- select the SS ribbon equivalent (see SS Ribbon). The Sign On to Spreadsheet Server dialog box appears. 3. Two methods are available for signing onto Spreadsheet Server: Option 1 - Pre-defined Connection User Name: Host Name or IP Address - iseries system name or IP address that hosts the database Database Library - name of library containing the General Ledger data User Name - defaults the Application User Name assigned to the user in the Configurator Password - only required if a password was created for the user in the Configurator Retrieve account balances from local database Option 2 - <Sign-On>: Host Name or IP Address - iseries system name or IP address that hosts the database Database Library - name of library containing the General Ledger data User Name - standard iseries sign on Password - standard iseries password Retrieve account balances from local database 4. When the Retrieve account balances from local database option is selected, click More... and specify the following: Local Database Type - indicates the database type and connection or database path Work in Local Mode without a connection Note: When working without a connection, the user only has access to account balances in the local database file. As a result drill downs to journals, GXEs to journals, GXDs, and list accounts will not be functional. In addition, Infinium security is not utilized; however, the system continues to verify that the user is a valid Spreadsheet Server user, thus the user must have the Configurator on their hard drive. 5. Click OK. Click the link to go to a related topic: Sign On, Control Panel, Disable/Enable Formula Calculations or Reset Host Server Connection.

143 GL Reporting Infinium Ledger Specifics Use the table to enter data on the Settings - Ledger Specifics - Infinium panel. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the SS Settings section to review generic processing fields. Field Description Infinium Segment Options: Number of Segments in Account Structure Specify the maximum number of account segments to be used for processing in Spreadsheet Server. Account Segments Specify the name for each account segment. User Fields Specify the name for each user field. Infinium Processing Options: GXL: Include Opening Balance If selected, the GXL formula includes opening balances when calculating in YTD Format Calculations the YTD format. Click the link to go to a related topic: SS Settings. Global Software, Inc.

144 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Infinium Build a Template for GXL As fields on the Build a Template - GXL panel vary based upon the selected ledger, use the table to enter data unique for an Infinium ledger. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the Build a Template section to review generic processing fields. Field Description Balance Type Click the down arrow and select the balance type. Valid values are M (Monetary), S (Statistical), D (Debit Balances), C (Credit Balances), 1 (Numeric User Field 1) and 2 (Numeric User Field 2). Note: Currency must be blank when balance type is S. Budget/Actuals Specify whether to retrieve actual or budget data. Valid values are ACTUALS or the name of the budget. Year Click the down arrow and select the reporting year. Format Click the down arrow and select the time range for which to retrieve data. Valid formats are PER, QTR, YTD, LTD, and RANGE. Period Click the down arrow and select the corresponding period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e. 1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format. Currency Specify a valid currency code, or leave blank when retrieving statistical balances. Database Library If applicable, specify the database library from which to retrieve the data. The library entered here overrides the default library in the Configurator or the library specified during the sign on process.

145 GL Reporting 137 Field Description Append If selected, adds an AND/OR user list comparison to the account string criteria. And/Or When Append is selected, specify the appropriate user list criteria operand. Valid values are AND (account must meet both the account string and user list criteria) and OR (account must meet either the account string or user list criteria). User List When Append is selected, specify the user list to be used by the formula. Note: The user list must be established in the segment list file (see Create/Maintain Segment Lists). The syntax used for entering the user list (where nnnn is the user list name). User Fields Click the down arrow and select whether to toggle the account segments to user fields. Valid values are NA (use account segments), Y (use user fields), or N (use account segments). If not specified, NA is assumed. Click the link to go to a related topic: Build a Template. Global Software, Inc.

146 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Infinium GXL Use the GXL formula to retrieve account balances for a specific format/reporting period. The following is an overview for the GXL formula for an Infinium ledger. Syntax: =GXL("Balance Type","Budget/Actuals","Key3","Year","Format","Period","Account Segment 1","Account Segment 2","Account Segment 3","Account Segment 4","Account Segment 5"...) Note: It is most common to use cell references within GXL formulas to identify parameters. Parameters: Balance Type Balance types are: M Monetary balances S Statistical balances (currency code must be blank) D Debit balances C Credit balances 1 Numeric User Field 1 2 Numeric User Field 2 Budget/Actuals Identifies whether to retrieve actual or budget data. Valid values are ACTUALS or the budget name. Key 3 Optionally identifies currency, alternate database library, append user list (AND or OR), use user fields instead of account segments, and/or Budget Manager name/revision. Enter the necessary literal and a value as defined below. If more than one variable needs to be defined, separate the variables by a semi-colon. Enter the literal "CURRENCY=XXX" where XXX is the name of the currency to be used. Must be blank when retrieving statistical balances. Enter the literal "LIBRARY=XXX" where XXX is the name of the alternate library which overrides the default library in the Configurator or the library specified during the sign on process. Enter the literal "ANDUSERLIST:NNNN" where NNNN is the user list name. Account must meet both the account string and user list criteria. Enter the literal "ORUSERLIST:NNNN" where NNNN is the user list name. Account must meet either the account string or user list criteria. Enter the literal "INFINIUMUSERFIELDS=X" where X is NA (use account segments), Y (use user fields), or N (use account segments). If not specified, NA is assumed. Enter the literal "BUDGETNAME=NNNN" and "BUDGETREVISION=XXX where NNNN is the budget name and XXX is the budget revision. Year Year identifier.

147 GL Reporting 139 Format Format options are: PER Activity for the selected period QTR Activity for the periods included in the selected quarter number YTD Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number excluding or including the opening balance based upon an option on the Setting's Ledger Specifics panel LTD Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number including the opening balance RANGE Activity for a range of periods specified Period Corresponds to period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e. 1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format. Account Segment 1-9 Enter one parameter for each segment of the account string (i.e. Company, Segment 2-9). The number of account segments are based upon the number of segments specified on the Settings - Ledger Specifics - Infinium panel. May be a single value, BLANK value, NOTBLANK value, mask, range, value list, segment list, hierarchy value field (see Account Segment Syntax). Formula Example - Using Single Values: =GXL("M","Actuals","CURRENCY=USD";"LIBRARY=","2001","PER","1","001","000","1070","001") Retrieves the actual monetary activity for period 1 of 2001 for account string Global Software, Inc.

148 140 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Formula Example - Using User Fields: =GXL ("M","Actuals","CURRENCY=USD";"LIBRARY=";"INFINIUMUSERFIELDS=Y","2001","PER","1","001","BEN","4000", "DIST","PROD") Retrieves the actual monetary activity for period 1 of 2001 for company 001 using user fields 1, 2, 3 and 4 criteria. Formula Example - Using a User List: =GXL ("M","Actuals","LIBRARY=";"CURRENCY=USD";"ANDUSERLIST=@Tax","2002","YTD","11","001","310","6*","*") Retrieves actual monetary year-to-date activity thru period 11 for accounts beginning with 6 which also meet the user field criteria in the TAX segment list. Click the link to go to a related topic: Control Panel, GL Reporting, Formula Assistant or GXL Formula for Account Values.

149 GL Reporting Infinium GXD For an Infinium ledger, the GXD formula is used to retrieve an account description for a single account string. In the event multiple accounts are referenced in a single GXD formula, then the system returns the description for the first account string found, and adds a warning message to the log indicating that the GXD results returned more than one record. Syntax: =GXD("Library","Account String") Note: It is most common to use cell references within GXD formulas to identify parameters. Parameters: Library Identifies the alternate library from which to retrieve the description. Entry is optional. If left blank, the system uses the default library in the Configurator or the library specified during the sign on process. Account String Enter one parameter for each segment of the account string for which to retrieve the description. The number of account segments are based upon the number of segments specified on the Settings - Ledger Specifics - Infinium panel. Formula Examples: =GXD(,"001","310","6000","005") Retrieves the account description for the account string Click the link to go to a related topic: GL Reporting or Formula Assistant. Global Software, Inc.

150 142 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M Jack Henry JH Sign On Follow the steps below to start the add-in component of Spreadsheet Server for a Jack Henry ledger. When user settings are set to start Spreadsheet Server during Excel startup, then step 2 is not applicable. When unattended (auto) signon is activated, steps 3 and 4 are not applicable. 1. Start Excel. 2. In Excel from the SServer Disabled menu, select Start Spreadsheet Server -or- select the SS ribbon equivalent (see SS Ribbon). The Sign On to Spreadsheet Server dialog box appears. 3. On the Sign On dialog box specify the following information: Host Name or IP Address - iseries system name or IP address that hosts the database Database Library - name of library containing the General Ledger data User Name - standard iseries sign on Password - standard iseries password 4. Click OK. Click the link to go to a related topic: Sign On, Control Panel, Disable/Enable Formula Calculations or Reset Host Server Connection.

151 GL Reporting JH Ledger Specifics Jack Henry Silverlake Use the table to enter data on the Settings - Ledger Specifics - Jack Henry Silverlake panel. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the SS Settings section to review generic processing fields. Field Description Jack Henry Silverlake Options: Current Year Specify the current accounting year in the ledger. Use Alternate Open Balance If selected, an alternate opening balance calculation is performed resolving Calculation (CMEB1 - CMTD1) a Retained Earnings/Consolidation issue in BEGCYR fields. Jack Henry 20/20 Use the table to enter data on the Settings - Ledger Specifics - Jack Henry 20/20 panel. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the SS Settings section to review generic processing fields. Field Description Jack Henry 20/20 Options: Current Year Specify the current accounting year in the ledger. Click the link to go to a related topic: SS Settings. Global Software, Inc.

152 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 JH Build a Template for GXL As fields on the Build a Template - GXL panel vary based upon the selected ledger, use the table to enter data unique for a Jack Henry ledger. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the Build a Template section to review generic processing fields. Field Description Data Type Click the down arrow and select the data type for which to retrieve data. Silverlake valid values are ACTUAL, AGGREGATE, AVERAGE, CURBAL, YESBAL, BUDGETA and BUDGETB. CIF 20/20 valid values are ACTUAL, AGGREGATE, AVERAGE, CBAL, YESBAL, BUDGETA, and BUDGETB. Time Span Click the down arrow and select the time span for which to retrieve data. Silverlake valid values are CURRENT, PRIOR1, PRIOR2 and FUTURE. CIF 20/20 valid values are CURRENT and PRIOR1. Year Click the down arrow and select the reporting year. This field is for informational purposes only. Format Click the down arrow and select the time range for which to retrieve data. Valid formats are PER, QTR, YTD, LTD, and RANGE. Period Click the down arrow and select the corresponding period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e. 1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format. Level Click the down arrow and select the account posting level. Zero indicates detail level account, 1-8 indicates roll up level account, and blank includes all account levels. Click the link to go to a related topic: Build a Template.

153 GL Reporting JH GXL Use the GXL formula to retrieve account balances for a specific format/reporting period. The following is an overview for the GXL formula for a Jack Henry ledger. Syntax - Silverlake: =GXL("Data Type","Time Span","Key 3","Year","Format","Period","Account Segment 1","Account Segment 2","Account Segment 3","Account Segment 4","Account Segment 5") Syntax - CIF 20/20: =GXL("Data Type","Time Span","Key 3","Year","Format","Period","Account Segment 1","Account Segment 2") Note: It is most common to use cell references within GXL formulas to identify parameters. Parameters: Data Type Identifies the type of data to retrieve. Valid data types are: Data Type Description Silverlake CIF 20/20 ACTUAL Actual period to date data * * AGGREGATE Sum of daily balances * * AVERAGE Aggregate total divided by number of days * CURBAL Current daily balance * CBAL Current daily balance YESBAL Yesterday balance * * BUDGETA Budget balances * * BUDGETB Budget balances * * * Time Span Identifies the time span for data to retrieve. Valid time spans are: Time Span Description Silverlake CIF 20/20 CURRENT Current Year * * PRIOR1 Prior Year * * PRIOR2 2 Years Prior * FUTURE Future Year * Key 3 Identifies the level and the optional alternate library to be used. Enter the necessary literal and a value as defined below. If more than one variable needs to be defined, separate the variables by a semi-colon. Enter the literal "LEVEL=X" where X is the account posting level. Zero indicates detail level account, 1-8 indicates roll up level account, and blank includes all account levels. Enter the literal "LIBRARY=NNNN" where NNNN is the name of the alternate library. Year Year identifier. For information purposes only (not used in the actual calculation). May enter 0. Global Software, Inc.

154 146 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Format Format options are: PER Activity for the selected period QTR Activity for the periods included in the selected quarter number YTD Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number excluding the opening balance LTD Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number including the opening balance RANGE Activity for a range of periods specified Period Corresponds to period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e. 1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format. Account Segment 1-5 Enter one parameter for each segment of the account string. The number of account segments will vary based upon the account structure for the selected ledger (i.e. Silverlake = Bank, Branch, Account, Cost Center, Product Code; CIF 20/20 = Branch, Account). May be a single value, mask, range, value list, segment list, hierarchy value field (see Account Segment Syntax). Formula Example - Silverlake - Using Single Values: =GXL("ACTUAL","CURRENT","LEVEL=0","0","PER","8","1","1"," ","0","0") Retrieves the actual balance for period 8 of the current year for a single account string. Formula Example - CIF 20/20 - Using Single Values: =GXL("ACTUAL","CURRENT","LEVEL=0","0","PER","8","1","11200") Retrieves the actual balance for period 8 of the current year for a single account string. Click the link to go to a related topic: Control Panel, GL Reporting, Formula Assistant or GXL Formula for Account Values.

155 GL Reporting JH GXD For a Jack Henry ledger, the GXD formula is used to retrieve an account description for a single account string. Syntax: =GXD("Account String") Note: It is most common to use cell references within GXD formulas to identify parameters. Parameters: Account String Identifies the account string for which to retrieve the description. Formula Example - Silverlake: =GXD(" ") Retrieves the account description for the account string (BANK-BRANCH-ACCOUNT-COST CENTER-PRODUCT CODE). Formula Example - CIF 20/20: =GXD(" ") Retrieves the account description for the account string (BRANCH-ACCOUNT). Click the link to go to a related topic: GL Reporting or Formula Assistant. Global Software, Inc.

156 148 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M JD Edwards JDE Sign On Follow the steps below to start the add-in component of Spreadsheet Server for a JD Edwards (JDE) ledger. When user settings are set to start Spreadsheet Server during Excel startup, then step 2 is not applicable. When unattended (auto) signon is activated, steps 3 and 4 are not applicable. 1. Start Excel. 2. In Excel from the SServer Disabled menu, select Start Spreadsheet Server -or- select the SS ribbon equivalent (see SS Ribbon). The JD Edwards Login dialog box appears. 3. Two methods are available for signing onto Spreadsheet Server: Option 1 - Pre-defined Connection User Name: User ID - defaults the Application User Name assigned to the user in the Configurator Password - only required if a password was created for the user in the Configurator Retrieve account balances from local database Option 2 - <Sign-On>: User ID - standard database sign on Password - standard database password Retrieve account balances from local database 4. When the Retrieve account balances from local database option is selected, click More... and specify the following: Local Database Type - indicates the database type and connection or database path Work in Local Mode without a connection Note: When working without a connection, the user only has access to account balances in the local database file. As a result drill downs to journals, GXEs to journals, GXDs for company and business unit, and list accounts will not be functional. In addition, JDE security is not utilized; however, the system continues to verify that the user is a valid Spreadsheet Server user, thus the user must have the Configurator on their hard drive. 5. Click OK. Click the link to go to a related topic: Sign On, Control Panel, Disable/Enable Formula Calculations or Reset Host Server Connection.

157 GL Reporting JDE Ledger Specifics Use the table to enter data on the Settings - Ledger Specifics - JD Edwards panel. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the SS Settings section to review generic processing fields. Field Description JD Edwards Processing Options: Number of Decimal Positions for Amounts Specify the number of positions to move the decimal when displaying dollar amounts. Ex: JDE stores the amount as a whole number (i.e ), thus when a '2' is entered for this option, Spreadsheet Server would display the amount as Alternate Language Code Specify the alternative language from the F0901D file to be used for displaying account descriptions. Leave the field blank to retrieve account descriptions from the F0901 file. Limit Segment Lookup Results If selected, the number of segment records loaded during a segment value to nnnn Records lookup (i.e. Locate Segment panel, or when click the ellipse button for an account segment on the Build a Template or Control Panel panel) is limited by the number of records specified. Journal Drill Down: Do Not If selected, journal drill downs and GXE journal entry detail expanded Include MA Code and MA Type reports exclude MA Code and MA Type fields as data output. Fields Journal Drill Down: Do Not Include GLAID Field (Outsider Lease) If selected, journal drill downs and GXE journal entry detail expanded reports exclude the GLALID (Outsider Lease/Well ID) field as data output. Journal Entry Drill Down: View Click the down arrow and select the type of journal entries to display on Preference the journal entry drill down panel. Valid values are Posted Entries Only, Unposted Entries Only, and Both Posted and Unposted. Default Configuration Global Software, Inc. Click the down arrow and select the configuration to be defaulted on the Build a Template and the Control Panel panels.

158 150 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Field Description JD Edwards Batch Types: Accounts Payable / Accounts Receivable / Inventory Specify the single character batch type codes used for the applicable subsystems. Choices should be separated by a comma. Click the link to go to a related topic: SS Settings.

159 GL Reporting JDE Build a Template for GXL As fields on the Build a Template - GXL panel vary based upon the selected ledger, use the table to enter data unique for a JDE ledger. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the Build a Template section to review generic processing fields. Field Description Configuration Click the down arrow and select the host configuration to be used. The list only displays configurations to which the user is authorized. Note: In Demo Mode the value is hard coded to GXL Demo. Ledger Type Click the down arrow and select the ledger type code containing the balances. Year Click the down arrow and select the reporting year. Format Click the down arrow and select the time range for which to retrieve data. Valid formats are PER, QTR, YTD, LTD, RANGE, BLTD, BLTDAPR, BLTDREQ. Period Click the down arrow and select the corresponding period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e. 1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format. Currency Specify a valid currency code. Leave blank to use the base currency assigned in the user settings. Enter * to retrieve all currencies. Weekly If selected, the formula retrieves weekly balances instead of period balances. Click the link to go to a related topic: Build a Template. Global Software, Inc.

160 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 JDE Formula Assistant for GXL As fields on the Formula Assistant - GXL panel vary based upon the selected ledger, use the table to enter data unique for a JDE ledger. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the Formula Assistant section to review generic processing fields. Field Description Configuration Specify the host configuration to be used. Ledger Type Specify the ledger type code containing the balances. Year Specify the reporting year. Format Specify the time range for which to retrieve data. Valid formats are PER, QTR, YTD, LTD, RANGE, BLTD, BLTDAPR, BLTDREQ. Period Specify the corresponding period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e. 1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format. Currency Specify a valid currency code. Leave blank to use the base currency assigned in the user settings. Enter * to retrieve all currencies. BU Status Code If selected, the business unit status code is included as part of the formula criteria. Note: When the Budget Manager option is selected, the BU Status Code option may not be selected.

161 GL Reporting 153 Field Description Blank / Not Blank / Value When BU Status Code is selected, specify whether to compare the business unit status code to blank, not blank or a value. Specific valid values are K, N, and P (or the cell reference containing the value). Note: When a specific value is entered, double quotes are not required around the value. Budget Manager If selected, the formula retrieves budget amounts which have been loaded into Spreadsheet Server from Global's Budget Manager. Note: When the BU Status Code option is selected, the Budget Manager option may not be selected. Budget Name / Budget Version When Budget Manager is selected, specify the budget name and budget version number (or the cell reference containing the values) from which to retrieve budget data. Weekly If selected, the formula retrieves weekly balances instead of period balances. Invert Sign If selected, the account balance sign displayed is reversed. Click the link to go to a related topic: Formula Assistant. Global Software, Inc.

162 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 JDE Formula Assistant for GXSALES Use the table to enter data on the Formula Assistant - GXSALES panel. Field Description Configuration Click the down arrow and select the host configuration to be used. The list only displays configurations to which the user is authorized. Total Field Click the down arrow and select the field to be totaled. Total Type Click the down arrow and select the type of total to be calculated. Valid types are Average, Count, Maximum, Minimum, and Summary. Criteria Click the down arrow and select the field(s) to be used as filtering criteria for the formula. Value Cell Specify the cell location containing the selection value for the corresponding criteria field. Retrieve Data from Sales History If selected, the formula retrieves data from the Sales History file (F42119). File (F42119) Otherwise, data is retrieved from the Sales Order Detail file (F4211). Click the link to go to a related topic: Formula Assistant or JDE GXSALES.

163 GL Reporting JDE GXL Use the GXL formula to retrieve account balances for a specific format/reporting period. The following is an overview for the GXL formula for a JDE ledger. Syntax: =GXL("Configuration","Ledger Type","Key3","Year","Format","Period","Account Segment 1","Account Segment 2","Account Segment 3","Account Segment 4","Account Segment 5","Account Segment 6") Note: It is most common to use cell references within GXL formulas to identify parameters. Parameters: Configuration Identifies the host configuration from which to retrieve account balances. May specify either the full configuration name or just the number. Ledger Type Identifies the ledger type code containing the account balances. May be a single value, mask or value list (no excludes allowed); however, a mask or value list is not supported when processing in local mode. Key 3 Identifies currency and balance type, and optionally identifies the business unit status and/or Budget Manager name/ revision. Enter the necessary literal and a value as defined below. If more than one variable needs to be defined, separate the variables by a semi-colon. Enter the literal "CURRENCY=XXX" where XXX is the name of the currency to be used. If not specified, the system uses the base currency from the user's settings. Enter '*' to retrieve all currencies. Note: In JDE currency amounts are stored in one of two fields, GBCRCX or GBCRCD. If the formula is not returning values, insert an X before the currency. Ex: =GXL("1","AA","CURRENCY=XUSD";"WEEKLY=FALSE","2012","PER","1","00001","1","1110","FIB") Enter the literal "WEEKLY=NNNN" where NNNN is either TRUE or FALSE. Enter the literal "BUSTATUS=NNNN" where NNNN is either BLANK, NOTBLANK, K, N or P. Enter the literal "BUDGETNAME=NNNN" and "BUDGETREVISION=XXX where NNNN is the budget name and XXX is the budget revision. Year Year identifier. Format Format options are: PER Activity for the selected period QTR Activity for the periods included in the selected quarter number YTD Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number excluding the opening balance LTD Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number including the opening balance RANGE Activity for a range of periods specified BLTD Activity for period 1 thru the designated period number including the original budget amount (Budget Ledger Type) BLTDAPR Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number including the approved budget amount (Budget Ledger Type) BLTDREQ Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number including the requested budget amount (Budget Ledger Type) Global Software, Inc.

164 156 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Period Corresponds to period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e. 1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format. Ledger Type Format Period(s) Results Actual PER 0 Budget ANY 55 Retrieves beginning original budget amount Budget ANY 56 Retrieves beginning approved budget amount Budget ANY 57 Retrieves beginning requested budget amount Actual or Budget PER, QTR or RANGE X.X Pulls activity for a range of periods where X.X represents the beginning and ending range of period numbers Retrieves balance forward amount Account Segment 1-6 Enter one parameter for each segment of the account string (i.e. Company, Business Unit, Object, Subsidiary, Subledger Type, Subledger). The company, business unit and object are required elements. May be a single value, BLANK value, NOTBLANK value, mask, range, value list, segment list, hierarchy value field (see Account Segment Syntax). Formula Example - Using Single Values: =GXL("1","AA","CURRENCY=***";"WEEKLY=FALSE","1998","PER","6","00001","1","1110","FIB","*","*") Retrieves the activity for period 9 of 1998 using ledger type AA for account string FIB for all subledgers. Click the link to go to a related topic: Control Panel, GL Reporting, Formula Assistant or GXL Formula for Account Values.

165 GL Reporting JDE GXD For a JDE ledger, the GXD formula is used to retrieve a description for a single account string, or company or business unit segment. Syntax: =GXD("Configuration","Value","Description Type") Note: It is most common to use cell references within GXD formulas to identify parameters. Parameters: Configuration Identifies the host configuration from which to retrieve the description. May specify either the full configuration name or just the number. Value If description type is Account String (AC), identifies the account string. If description type is Company (CO), identifies the company. If description type is Business Unit (BU), identifies the business unit. Description Type Identifies the segment type for which to retrieve a description. Valid values are Account String (AC), Company (CO), and Business Unit (BU). Formula Example - Retrieve an Account String Description: =GXD("1"," FIB","AC") Retrieves the account description for the account string FIB. Global Software, Inc.

166 158 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Formula Example - Retrieve a Company Description: =GXD("1","00001","CO") Retrieves the description for company Formula Example - Retrieve a Business Unit Description: =GXD("1","1","BU") Retrieves the description for business unit 1. Click the link to go to a related topic: GL Reporting or Formula Assistant.

167 GL Reporting JDE GXSALES Use the GXSALES formula to retrieve sales totals based upon sales criteria. Sales data may be retrieved from either the Sales Order Detail file (F4211) or the Sales Order History file (F42119). Syntax: =GXSALES("Configuration","Total Field","Total Type","Retrieve Data from Sales History File","Criteria 01","Criteria 02","Criteria 03","Criteria 04","Criteria 05","Criteria 06","Criteria 07") Parameters: Configuration Identifies the host configuration from which to retrieve sales totals. May specify either the full configuration name or just the number. Total Field Identifies the related sales field to be totaled. Total field options are: Description Table.Field Extended Cost F4211.SDECST Extended Price F4211.SDAEXP Gross Weight F4211.SDGRWT Open Amount F4211.SDAOPN Qty Backordered F4211.SDSOBK Qty Canceled F4211.SDSOCN Qty Committed F4211.SDSONE Qty Open F4211.SDUOPN Qty Ordered F4211.SDUORG Qty Shipped F4211.SDSOQS Qty Shipped To-Date F4211.SDQTYT Trade Discount F4211.SDTRDC Total Type Identifies the type of total to be calculated. Valid types are Average, Count, Maximum, Minimum, and Summary. Criteria / Value Identifies up to 7 criteria parameters and the associated value to be used for selecting data. The list of available selection criteria fields is maintained in the Configurator by the administrator. Retrieve Data from Sales History File Identifies to retrieve data from the sales history file (F42119) instead of the sales order detail file (F4211). Formula Example - GXSALES Extended Price - Average Sales: =GXSALES(1, "F4211.SDAEXP","AVG","SALES;HISTORY=YES","F4211.SDTRDJ D","6/01/1998.6/30/1998","F4211.SDMCU B12","30","F4211.SDDCTO A02","SO") Retrieves the average sales totals from sales history file F42119 for order date range 6/1/1998 to 6/30/1998. Global Software, Inc.

168 160 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Click the link to go to a related topic: JDE Formula Assistant for GXSALES.

169 GL Reporting JDE GXSALES Drill Down Once GXSALES formulas are constructed, drill down capability to the sales detail related to the amount, quantity or weight exists. The drill down results can appear in a single panel, tabbed panel or worksheet based upon an option in the user's settings. Additionally, GXSALES criteria in the Configurator determines whether or not a field appears in the Sales Detail drill down grid. 1. Select a cell containing a GXSALES formula, then right click and select Spreadsheet Server>Drill Down. The Sales Detail drill down appears showing the associated sales detail from the F4211, F4101 and F0101 files. Nav Tip: This panel may also be accessed by selecting a cell and then selecting the menu, toolbar or ribbon equivalent (see SServer Menu, SS Toolbar or SS Ribbon). Nav Tip: The drill down data may also be pushed directly to a work sheet by selecting the ribbon equivalent (see SS Ribbon). Global Software, Inc.

170 162 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M JDE Fixed Asset Balances Global delivers Designer GL definitions, JDE_iSeries_FXA, JDE_Oracle_FXA and JDE_SQL_FXA, for retrieving JDE fixed asset account balances from the F1202 file. In addition, associated ad hoc queries are delivered for drilling down from JDE_FXA Designer GL GXL account balances to asset details. Below is a high level summary of the steps required for setting up and using a JDE_FXA Designer GL. To Setup and Process a JDE_FXA Designer GL: 1. Application Configurator>Application Settings>JD Edwards -- ensure the appropriate JDE host connection(s) is created. Contact your administrator for more information. Note: JDE host connection(s) created function for both the standard JDE ledger and JDE_FXA Designer GL. 2. Settings>General -- verify the General Ledger Type = JD Edwards. 3. Settings>File Locations -- verify the Ad Hoc Queries and Designer GL Definition file locations. 4. Settings>Ledger Specific>Designer GL -- ensure the proper host connection is assigned to the JDE_FXA Designer GL definition being used, and set the appropriate default Designer GL definition. 5. On the Control Panel or Build a Template panels, criteria defaults to JDE parameters; however, to process for the JDE_FXA Designer GL, select the appropriate Designer GL definition and criteria on the panel will change accordingly. Continue processing as normal.

171 GL Reporting JDE FASTR Report Conversion For JDE World customers only (iseries), Spreadsheet Server offers a utility to convert FASTR report definitions into Excel workbook formats. Using the template provided, users can select the FASTR program number and revision via the Get Report lookup feature and convert the report to Excel format. 1. From Windows Explorer, navigate to C:\Documents and Settings\Users\Public\Public Documents\Global Software Inc\Spreadsheet Server\Components. Open the Excel spreadsheet named JDE Fastr Template and enable the macros. The spreadsheet loads and a new menu called FASTR is added to Excel. 2. In Excel from the FASTR menu, select Get Reports. The Host Signon for Reports dialog box appears. 3. On the Signon dialog box identify the host name, user ID and password, and click Sign On. The FASTR Reports panel appears. 4. On the FASTR Reports panel, specify the name of the library containing the FASTR reports and click Show Reports. A list of reports appears. Global Software, Inc.

172 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Double click on the desired report (Program ID and Version ID) to be converted. The conversion process creates an Excel workbook using the Program ID and Version ID as the name and stores it in the location identified at the bottom of the FASTR Reports panel.

173 GL Reporting 7.19 Lawson Lawson Sign On 165 Follow the steps below to start the add-in component of Spreadsheet Server for a Lawson ledger. When user settings are set to start Spreadsheet Server during Excel startup, then step 2 is not applicable. When unattended (auto) signon is activated, steps 3 and 4 are not applicable. 1. Start Excel. 2. In Excel from the SServer Disabled menu, select Start Spreadsheet Server -or- select the SS ribbon equivalent (see SS Ribbon). The Sign On to Spreadsheet Server dialog box. 3. Two methods are available for signing onto Spreadsheet Server: Option 1 - Direct Connect: Select the Direct check box Specify the following fields: Host Name or IP Address - host or IP Address that hosts the database Service - Oracle Service Name indicating where the database is located Port - port number User Name - defaults the Application User Name assigned to the user in the Configurator Password - only required if a password was created for the user in the Configurator Option 2 - Oracle Client: Do not select the Direct check box Specify the following fields: Oracle Service Name - Service Name configured via the Oracle Net Manager User Name - defaults the Application User Name assigned to the user in the Configurator Password - only required if a password was created for the user in the Configurator 4. Click OK. Click the link to go to a related topic: Sign On, Control Panel, Disable/Enable Formula Calculations or Reset Host Server Connection. Global Software, Inc.

174 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Lawson Build a Template for GXL As fields on the Build a Template - GXL panel vary based upon the selected ledger, use the table to enter data unique for a Lawson ledger. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the Build a Template section to review generic processing fields. Field Description Balance Type Click the down arrow and select the balance type. Valid values are A (Actual Dollars), B (Budget Dollars), AU (Actual Units), and BU (Budget Units). Budget # When Balance Type is B or BU, specify the budget number. Year Click the down arrow and select the reporting year. Format Click the down arrow and select the time range for which to retrieve data. Valid formats are PER, QTR, YTD, LTD, and RANGE. Period Click the down arrow and select the corresponding period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e. 1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format. Click the link to go to a related topic: Build a Template.

175 GL Reporting Lawson GXL Use the GXL formula to retrieve account balances for a specific format/reporting period. The following is an overview for the GXL formula for a Lawson ledger. Syntax: =GXL("Balance Type","Budget #","Key3","Year","Format","Period","Account Segment 1","Account Segment 2","Account Segment 3","Account Segment 4","Account Segment 5") Note: It is most common to use cell references within GXL formulas to identify parameters. Parameters: Balance Type Identifies the balance type. Valid types are A (Actual), AU (Actual Units), B (Budget), or BU (Budget Units). Budget # Identifies the budget number. This value is required if Balance Type is either B or BU. Key 3 Not used currently. Enter 0. Year Year identifier. Format Format options are: PER Activity for the selected period QTR Activity for the periods included in the selected quarter number YTD Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number excluding the opening balance LTD Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number including the opening balance RANGE Activity for a range of periods specified Period Corresponds to period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e. 1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format. Account Segment 1-5 Enter one parameter for each segment of the account string (i.e. Company, Account Unit, Account, Sub-Account, Chart of Accounts). May be a single value, mask, range, value list, segment list, hierarchy value field (see Account Segment Syntax). Formula Example - Using Masks: =GXL("A",,"0","2005","PER","12","10","6044*","3*","*","*") Retrieves the actual activity for period 12 of 2005 for company 10, account units starting with 6044 and all accounts starting with 3. Global Software, Inc.

176 168 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Formula Example - Using a Range: =GXL("A",,"0","2005","PER","12","10","5500*"," ","*","*") Retrieves the actual activity for period 12 of 2005 for company 10, account units starting with 5500 and all accounts in the range of thru Click the link to go to a related topic: Control Panel, GL Reporting, Formula Assistant or GXL Formula for Account Values.

177 GL Reporting Lawson GXD For a Lawson ledger, the GXD formula is used to retrieve an account description for a single account string. Syntax: =GXD("Account","Sub Account","Chart Name") Note: It is most common to use cell references within GXD formulas to identify parameters. Parameters: Account Identifies the account value of the account string for which to retrieve the description. Sub Account Identifies the sub account value of the account string for which to retrieve the description. Chart Name Identifies the name of the chart of accounts from which to retrieve the description. Entry is optional if the specified account string only exists in one chart of accounts. Formula Example: =GXD("40100","0","DCHHEALTHSYS") Retrieves the segment description for account and sub-account 0. Click the link to go to a related topic: GL Reporting or Formula Assistant. Global Software, Inc.

178 170 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M Movex Movex Sign On Follow the steps below to start the add-in component of Spreadsheet Server for a Movex ledger. When user settings are set to start Spreadsheet Server during Excel startup, then step 2 is not applicable. When unattended (auto) signon is activated, steps 3 and 4 are not applicable. 1. Start Excel. 2. In Excel from the SServer Disabled menu, select Start Spreadsheet Server -or- select the SS ribbon equivalent (see SS Ribbon). The Sign On to Spreadsheet Server dialog box. 3. On the Sign On dialog box specify the following information: Host Name or IP Address - iseries system name or IP address that hosts the database Database Library - name of library or catalog containing the General Ledger data User Name - standard iseries or SQL Server sign on Password - standard iseries or SQL Server password 4. Click OK. Click the link to go to a related topic: Sign On, Control Panel, Disable/Enable Formula Calculations or Reset Host Server Connection.

179 GL Reporting Movex Ledger Specifics Use the table to enter data on the Settings - Ledger Specifics - Movex panel. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the SS Settings section to review generic processing fields. Field Description Movex Options: Chart of Accounts by Division If selected, accounts in Movex are division specific. Otherwise, accounts in Movex are not division specific. Use RVFRFN for Budget Data (Older Movex Versions) If selected, budget names/data are retrieved from RVFRFN. Drill Down: By Balance Key If selected, drill downs use the balance key specified on the GXL formula. Otherwise, drill downs use a balance key of 8. Drill Down: Include Third Currency Amount If selected, drill downs include the third currency amount. Period Type for Retrieving Begin/End Dates Specify the period type to be used for retrieving beginning and ending dates for the company/division. Period types are defined in the CSYPER table in the Movex database. Dimension Number Used for Account Descriptions Specify the dimension number to be used for retrieving the account description when processing a GXD formula. Journal Entry Drill Down: Max Dimensions Specify the maximum number of dimensions to be used when drilling down to journal entry detail. Valid values are 0-7. Click the link to go to a related topic: SS Settings. Global Software, Inc.

180 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Movex Build a Template for GXL As fields on the Build a Template - GXL panel vary based upon the selected ledger, use the table to enter data unique for a Movex ledger. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the Build a Template section to review generic processing fields. Field Description Budget Number If applicable, specify the budget number from which to retrieve data. Leave blank to retrieve actual data. Budget Revision If applicable, specify the budget revision from which to retrieve data. Entry is required if a budget number is specified. Year Click the down arrow and select the reporting year. Format Click the down arrow and select the time range for which to retrieve data. Valid formats are PER, QTR, YTD, LTD, and RANGE. Period Click the down arrow and select the corresponding period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e. 1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format. Balance Key Click the down arrow and select the balance key to be used to retrieve data. Stat Enter a Y to return statistic values; otherwise enter an N. Exchange Rate If applicable, click the down arrow and select the exchange rate to be multiplied by the balances to calculate the reporting amounts. Click the link to go to a related topic: Build a Template.

181 GL Reporting Movex GXL Use the GXL formula to retrieve account balances for a specific format/reporting period. The following is an overview for the GXL formula for a Movex ledger. Syntax: =GXL("Budget Number","Budget Revision","Key3","Year","Format","Period","Account Segment 1","Account Segment 2","Account Segment 3","Account Segment 4","Account Segment 5"...) Note: It is most common to use cell references within GXL formulas to identify parameters. Parameters: Budget Number Identifies the budget number. If left blank, actual data is retrieved. Budget Revision Identifies the budget revision. A budget revision is required if a budget number is specified. Key 3 Optionally identifies statistical data, alternate library, balance key, Budget Manager name/revision and/or exchange rate. Enter the necessary literal and a value as defined below. If more than one variable needs to be defined, separate the variables by a semi-colon. Enter the literal "STAT=Y" to indicate retrieval of statistical balances. Enter the literal "LIBRARY=NNNN" where NNNN is the name of the alternate library. Enter the literal "BALANCE KEY=XX" where XX is the balance key. Enter the literal "BUDGET:NNNN:XX" where NNNN is the budget name and XX is the budget revision. Enter the literal "EXCHRATE=NNNN" where NNNN is the exchange rate. Year Year identifier. Format Format options are: PER Activity for the selected period QTR Activity for the periods included in the selected quarter number YTD Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number excluding the opening balance LTD Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number including the opening balance RANGE Activity for a range of periods specified Period Corresponds to period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e. 1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format. Account Segment 1-9 Enter one parameter for each segment of the account string (i.e. Company, Division, Dimension 1-7). May be a single value, mask, range, value list, segment list, hierarchy value field (see Account Segment Syntax). Formula Example - Using Masks: =GXL(,,"STAT=N";"BALANCE KEY=8","2004","PER","4","210","AAA","51*","*","*","*") Retrieves the monetary activity for period 4 of 2004 for accounts starting with 51 using balance key 8. Global Software, Inc.

182 174 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Formula Example - Using a Range: =GXL(,,"STAT=N";"BALANCE KEY=8","2004","PER","4","210","AAA"," ") Retrieves the monetary activity for period 4 of 2004 for accounts 5100 thru 5500 using balance key 8. Formula Example - Retrieving Budget Data: =GXL("1","1","BALANCE KEY=8","2004","PER","4","210","AAA","5710","*","*","*") Retrieves the budget balance for period 4 of 2004 for an account mask using balance key 8, for Budget Number 1 and Budget Revision 1. Click the link to go to a related topic: Control Panel, GL Reporting, Formula Assistant or GXL Formula for Account Values.

183 GL Reporting Movex GXD For a Movex ledger, the GXD formula is used to retrieve an account description for a single account string. Syntax: =GXD("Company","Division","Dimension Number","Dimension Value") Note: It is most common to use cell references within GXD formulas to identify parameters. Parameters: Company Identifies the company. Division Identifies the division. Dimension Number Identifies the dimension number associated with the dimension value. Dimension Value Identifies the dimension value for which to retrieve the description. Formula Example: =GXD("210","AAA","1","5710") Retrieves the account description for company 210, division AAA and dimension 1 value of Click the link to go to a related topic: GL Reporting or Formula Assistant. Global Software, Inc. 175

184 176 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M Oracle Oracle Sign On Follow the steps below to start the add-in component of Spreadsheet Server for an Oracle ledger. When user settings are set to start Spreadsheet Server during Excel start up, then step 2 is not applicable. When unattended (auto) sign on is activated, steps 3 thru 6 are not applicable. 1. Start Excel. 2. In Excel from the SServer Disabled menu, select Start Spreadsheet Server -or- select the ribbon equivalent (see SS Ribbon). The Login dialog box appears. 3. Two methods are available for signing onto Spreadsheet Server: Option 1 - Direct Connect: Select the Direct check box Specify the following fields: Host - host or IP Address that hosts the database Service - Oracle Service Name indicating where the database is located Port - port number User Name - defaults the Application User Name assigned to the user in the Configurator Password - only required if a password was created for the user in the Configurator

185 GL Reporting 177 Option 2 - Oracle Client: Do not select the Direct check box Specify the following fields: Oracle Service Name - Service Name configured via the Oracle Net Manager User Name - defaults the Application User Name assigned to the user in the Configurator Password - only required if a password was created for the user in the Configurator 4. Click Login. The Oracle Default Responsibility panel appears, displaying the Responsibility previously selected. 5. Click on the drop down arrow to select a different Responsibility. 6. Click Continue. Click the link to go to a related topic: Sign On, Control Panel, Disable/Enable Formula Calculations or Reset Host Server Connection. Global Software, Inc.

186 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Oracle Ledger Specifics Use the table to enter data on the Settings - Ledger Specifics - Oracle panel, or to access other functions. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the SS Settings section to review generic processing fields. Field Description Oracle Options: Select Ledger Click the down arrow and select the ledger (a.k.a. set of books) to be used (i.e. number of segments, segment labels, etc.). This value is set when an Oracle Default Responsibility is selected during sign on -or- when the default in Excel on the SServer toolbar is changed. Right click and select Refresh to refresh the data. Number of Segments Specify the number of segments which make up the account. This value is automatically filled by the Select Ledger selection. Segment Number Used for Descriptions Displays for the currently selected ledger the segment number to be used for retrieving account descriptions on drill down panels and when processing GXE formulas. Use the Set Segment Number for All Ledgers button to change the value for all ledgers -or- use the Segment Mapping button to change the value for a single ledger. Language Specify the language to be used for account descriptions. Balance SQL Statement Hint by Balance Type Click the down arrow and select the balance type (i.e. A (Actual), B (Budget), E (Encumbrance) or P (Project)) and then in the adjacent field specify the user-defined index to be used with the associated balance type when processing Spreadsheet Server calculations. Use Summary Accounts If selected, summary accounts are included with non-summary accounts in the GXL formula calculation. Otherwise only non-summary accounts are used. This option only applies if the GXL Summary Accounts parameter is not specified or equals NA. Segments Displays the segment names for the ledger specified above.

187 GL Reporting 179 Button Function Segment Mapping Displays the Segment Mapping panel, allowing the user for each ledger to assign the segment number to be used for descriptions and to re-order account segments to match the order defined in the Oracle application (see Segment Mapping). Set Segment Number for All Ledgers Displays the Oracle Segment Number Used For Descriptions panel, allowing the user to assign the same segment number to be used for descriptions to all ledgers. This function is password protected. Add Sample Hint Inserts a sample index in the Balance SQL Statement Hint field. View Segment Security Displays any account restrictions based on the current sign-on ID and responsibility. Click the link to go to a related topic: SS Settings. Global Software, Inc.

188 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Oracle Build a Template for GXL As fields on the Build a Template - GXL panel vary based upon the selected ledger, use the table to enter data unique for an Oracle ledger. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the Build a Template section to review generic processing fields. Field Description Balance Type Click the down arrow and select the balance type. Valid values are A (Actual), B (Budget), E (Encumbrance), and P (Project). Note: When Balance Type = P, then Format should = PER. Balances retrieved are 'to-date' (i.e. running totals). In addition, drill down is only available to account balances, not to journals. Budget/En Type When Balance Type is B or E, click the down arrow and select the budget or encumbrance name. Year Click the down arrow and select the reporting year. Format Click the down arrow and select the time range for which to retrieve data. Valid formats are PER, QTR, YTD, LTD, and RANGE. Period Click the down arrow and select the corresponding period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e. 1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format. Translated Click the down arrow and select whether to display entered or translated currency balances. Valid values are E (Entered), T (Translated), and M (Multiple Reporting Currencies). Note: E must be used if the selected currency is the database's functionality currency or STAT. Note: Prior to selecting T, ensure that the currency translation has been processed in Oracle for the selected currency and reporting period.

189 GL Reporting 181 Field Description Currency Specify a valid currency code. Ledger Click the down arrow and select the ledger (a.k.a. set of books) for which to retrieve data. Summary Accts Click the down arrow and select which account types to use. Valid values are NA (use Summary Accounts option from Settings-Ledger Specifics to determine whether to include Summary Accounts with Non-Summary Accounts), Y (include only Summary Accounts), and N (include only NonSummary Accounts). FSG Report If desired, select the check box and then use the drop down box to select a FSG Report for which to create a Spreadsheet Server report. When this option is selected various fields on the panel will be disabled. Convert Missing Values to Parent Hierarchies When FSG Templates is selected, this option becomes enabled. If selected, missing single segment values are converted to parent hierarchies when the Spreadsheet Server report is created. Click the link to go to a related topic: Build a Template. Global Software, Inc.

190 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Oracle GXL Use the GXL formula to retrieve account balances for a specific format/reporting period. The following is an overview for the GXL formula for an Oracle ledger. Syntax: =GXL("Balance Type","Budget/EnType","Key 3","Year","Format","Period","Account Segment 1","Account Segment 2","Account Segment 3","Account Segment 4","Account Segment 5"...) Note: It is most common to use cell references within GXL formulas to identify parameters. Parameters: Balance Type Identifies the balance type. Valid types are A (Actual), B (Budget), E (Encumbrance), and P (Project). Budget/En Type Identifies the budget or encumbrance name. This value is required if Balance Type is either E or B. Key 3 Optionally identifies translation type, currency, ledger, account type, and translated flag criteria. Enter the necessary literal and a value as defined below. If more than one variable needs to be defined, separate the variables by a semi-colon. Enter 0 or leave blank if not used. Enter the literal "TRANSLATED=X" where X is the translation type. Valid types are E (Entered in the selected currency), T (Translated to the selected currency), and M (Multiple reporting currencies). E must be used if the selected currency is the database's functionality currency or STAT. Prior to selecting T, ensure that the currency translation has been processed in Oracle for the selected currency and reporting period. Enter the literal "CURRENCY=XXX" where XXX is the name of the currency to be used. Enter the literal "BOOK=XXX" where XXX is the name of the ledger (a.k.a. set of books) to be used. If not specified, the system uses the ledger identified on the SS toolbar. Enter the literal "SUMMARY=XX" where XX indicates which account types to use. Valid values are NA (use Summary Accounts option from Settings-Ledger Specifics to determine whether or not to include Summary Accounts with Non-Summary Accounts), Y (include only Summary Accounts), and N (include only Non-Summary Accounts). If not specified, NA is assumed. Enter the literal "TRANSLATEDFLAG=X" where X is the name of the translated flag to be used. Enter * to retrieve all records regardless of their assigned translated flag. Year Year identifier. Format Format options are: PER Activity for the selected period QTR Activity for the periods included in the selected quarter number YTD Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number excluding the opening balance LTD Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number including the opening balance RANGE Activity for a range of periods specified Period Corresponds to period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e. 1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format.

191 GL Reporting 183 Account Segment 1 - nn Enter one parameter for each segment of the account string. The number of account segments will vary based upon the account structure for the selected ledger. May be a single value, mask, range, value list, segment list, hierarchy value field (see Account Segment Syntax). Formula Example - Using Masks: =GXL("A",,"TRANSLATED="E";"&"CURRENCY="USD";"&"BOOK="VISION OPERATIONS (USA)";"&"TRANSLATEDFLAG="*";","2003","PER","6","01","*","1110","*","*") Retrieves the actual activity for period 6 of 2003 for an account mask using Vision Operations (USA) set of books. Formula Example - Using a Range: =GXL("A",,"TRANSLATED="E";"&"CURRENCY="USD";"&"BOOK="VISION OPERATIONS (USA)";"&"TRANSLATEDFLAG="*";","2003","PER","6","01","*"," ","*","*") Retrieves the actual activity for period 6 of 2003 for accounts 1110 thru 1999 using Vision Operations (USA) set of books. Click the link to go to a related topic: Control Panel, GL Reporting, Formula Assistant or GXL Formula for Account Values. Global Software, Inc.

192 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Oracle GXD For an Oracle ledger, the GXD formula is used to retrieve a description for a single account segment. Syntax: =GXD("Segment Num","Value","Ledger") Note: It is most common to use cell references within GXD formulas to identify parameters. Parameters: Segment Num Identifies the segment number of the account string for which to retrieve the description. Value Identifies the value of the account segment for which to retrieve the description. Ledger Identifies the ledger (a.k.a. set of books) from which to retrieve the description. Entry is optional if only one ledger is referenced in the workbook. Formula Example - Using a Single Segment: =GXD("3","1110","Vision Operations (USA)") Retrieves the description for segment 3 value 1110 from the Vision Operations (USA) set of books. Formula Example - Using Multiple Segments: =GXD(("1","01")& "-" &GXD("3","1640") Retrieves the description for segment 1 value 01 and concatenates the description for segment 3 value Click the link to go to a related topic: GL Reporting or Formula Assistant.

193 GL Reporting Segment Mapping Account segments may be re-ordered in the Oracle application. Use the following to re-order account segments in the Spreadsheet Server application to match the order defined in the Oracle application. In addition, use the Segment Mapping function to assign individually for each ledger (a.k.a. set of books) the segment number to be used for retrieving descriptions. Note: If segments are remapped, then standard delivered segment ad hoc queries will need to be modified. Contact Global for assistance. 1. In Excel from the SServer menu, select Settings. The Settings - General panel appears. Nav Tip: This panel may also be accessed by selecting the Settings tab on the Control Panel -or- by selecting the toolbar or ribbon equivalent (see SS Toolbar or SS Ribbon). 2. On the Settings panel, select the Ledger Specifics tab. The Ledger Specifics - Oracle panel appears. 3. On the Oracle panel, click the Segment Mapping button. The Segment Mapping panel appears. 4. On the Segment Mapping panel, use the appropriate drop down boxes to specify the following data: Ledger - Identify the ledger for which to assign the segment number for descriptions or to map/re-order account segments in Spreadsheet Server. The system will modify the available account segments based upon the selected ledger. Segment Number Used for Descriptions (SEGMENT X) - Identify the segment number to be used for retrieving account descriptions on drill down panels and when processing GXE formulas. Account Segments - Identify the proper segment number for each account segment. 5. Click the Save button to write the changes. 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5, until changes have been made for each ledger. 7. To exit the panel, click the Close button. Global Software, Inc.

194 186 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M PeopleSoft PSoft Sign On Follow the steps below to start the add-in component of Spreadsheet Server for a PeopleSoft ledger. When user settings are set to start Spreadsheet Server during Excel startup, then step 2 is not applicable. When unattended (auto) sign on is activated, steps 3 and 4 are not applicable. 1. Start Excel. 2. In Excel from the SServer Disabled menu, select Start Spreadsheet Server -or- select the SS ribbon equivalent (see SS Ribbon). The Sign On to Spreadsheet Server dialog box. 3. Various methods are available for signing onto Spreadsheet Server based upon the connection protocol being used: Option 1 - SQL Server or DSN: Host Name or IP Address - system name or IP address that hosts the database Database Library - name of library containing the General Ledger data DSN Name - name of the DSN connection User Name - defaults the Application User Name assigned to the user in the Configurator Password - only required if a password was created for the user in the Configurator Option 2 - Oracle Direct Connect: Select the Direct check box Specify the following fields: Host Name or IP Address - host or IP Address that hosts the database Service - Oracle Service Name indicating where the database is located Port - port number User Name - defaults the Application User Name assigned to the user in the Configurator Password - only required if a password was created for the user in the Configurator

195 GL Reporting 187 Option 3 - Oracle Client: Do not select the Direct check box Specify the following fields: Oracle Service Name - Service Name configured via the Oracle Net Manager User Name - defaults the Application User Name assigned to the user in the Configurator Password - only required if a password was created for the user in the Configurator 4. Click OK. Click the link to go to a related topic: Sign On, Control Panel, Disable/Enable Formula Calculations or Reset Host Server Connection. Global Software, Inc.

196 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 PSoft Ledger Specifics Use the table to enter data on the Settings - Ledger Specifics - PeopleSoft panel. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the SS Settings section to review generic processing fields. Field Description PeopleSoft Options: Set ID Specify the PeopleSoft set ID. Drill Down: Apply Effective Date Criteria If selected, drill downs include the effective date as part of the search criteria. Multi-Column Drill Down: Ignore Ledger If selected, multi-column drill downs ignore the ledger account segment parameter. Available Business Units for User Displays the business units available for the current user. Click the link to go to a related topic: SS Settings.

197 GL Reporting PSoft Build a Template for GXL As fields on the Build a Template - GXL panel vary based upon the selected ledger, use the table to enter data unique for a PeopleSoft ledger. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the Build a Template section to review generic processing fields. Field Description Balance Type Click the down arrow and select the balance type. Valid values are A (Actual), B (Budget), and E (Encumbrance). Business Unit Specify the reporting business unit. Year Click the down arrow and select the reporting year. Format Click the down arrow and select the time range for which to retrieve data. Valid formats are PER, QTR, YTD, LTD, and RANGE. Period Click the down arrow and select the corresponding period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e. 1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format. Currency Specify the reporting currency code. Click the link to go to a related topic: Build a Template. Global Software, Inc.

198 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 PSoft GXL Use the GXL formula to retrieve account balances for a specific format/reporting period. The following is an overview for the GXL formula for a PeopleSoff ledger. Syntax: =GXL("Balance Type","Business Unit","Key 3","Year","Format","Period","Account Segment 1","Account Segment 2","Account Segment 3","Account Segment 4","Account Segment 5"...) Note: It is most common to use cell references within GXL formulas to identify parameters. Parameters: Balance Type Identifies the balance type. Valid types are A (Actual), B (Budget, and E (Encumbrance). Business Unit Identifies the business unit. Key 3 Optionally identifies currency. Enter the necessary literal and a value as defined below. Enter 0 or leave blank if not used. Enter the literal "CURRENCY=XXX" where XXX is the name of the currency to be used. Year Year identifier. Format Format options are: PER Activity for the selected period QTR Activity for the periods included in the selected quarter number YTD Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number excluding the opening balance LTD Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number including the opening balance RANGE Activity for a range of periods specified OBAL or OPE Opening balance (i.e. period 0). Note: Any period value entered is ignored. CBAL or CLO Year to date activity including closing balances and/or adjusting entries (i.e. period 0-54). Note: Any period value entered is ignored. BP Budget amount for the selected period Period Corresponds to period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e. 1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format. Account Segment 1-10 Enter one parameter for each segment of the account string (i.e. Ledger, Fund Code, Department, Class Field, Program Code, Chart Field 1, Account, Project, Affiliate, Statistics Code). May be a single value, mask, range, value list, segment list, hierarchy value field (see Account Segment Syntax).

199 GL Reporting 191 Formula Example - Using Masks: =GXL("A","US005","CURRENCY=USD","2003","PER","6","LOCAL","*","20000","*","*","*","400000","*","*","*") Retrieves the actual activity for period 6 of 2003 for business unit US005, ledger LOCAL, department and all accounts starting with 4. Formula Example - Using a Range: =GXL("A","US005","CURRENCY=USD","2003","PER","6","LOCAL","*"," ","*","*","*","400000","*","*","*") Retrieves the actual activity for period 6 of 2003 for business unit US005, ledger LOCAL, departments in the range of thru 21999, and account Click the link to go to a related topic: Control Panel, GL Reporting, Formula Assistant or GXL Formula for Account Values. Global Software, Inc.

200 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 PSoft GXD For a PeopleSoft ledger, the GXD formula is used to retrieve a description for a single account segment. Syntax: =GXD("Segment Value") Note: It is most common to use cell references within GXD formulas to identify parameters. Parameters: Segment Value Identifies the segment value for which to retrieve the description. Formula Example - Using a Single Segment: =GXD("402000") Retrieves the description for account segment Formula Example - Using Multiple Segments: =GXD("402000")& "-" &GXD("3000") Retrieves the description for account segment and concatenates the description for project segment Click the link to go to a related topic: GL Reporting or Formula Assistant.

201 GL Reporting 7.23 SAP SAP Sign On 193 Follow the steps below to start the add-in component of Spreadsheet Server for a SAP ledger. When user settings are set to start Spreadsheet Server during Excel startup, then step 2 is not applicable. The dialog boxes used to sign onto Spreadsheet Server are determined by the Use SAP Login Dialog option in the user settings and the connection type assigned to the host configuration in the Configurator. 1. Start Excel. 2. In Excel from the SServer Disabled menu, select Start Spreadsheet Server -or- select the SS ribbon equivalent (see SS Ribbon). The Sign On to Spreadsheet Server dialog box -or- the SAP Logon dialog box appears. 3. On the Sign On or Logon dialog box specify the following information: Option 1 - Using Legacy SAP GUI connection type: From the list of SAP systems in your organization, select the desired system to sign onto. Specify the Client, User ID, Password and Language. Option 2 - Using SAP NetCo 3.0 connection type: Specify the Client, User ID, Password and Language. If necessary, click the System button, and select the desired system to sign onto. Option 3 - SAP Logon: Enter the standard information used to log onto SAP. 4. Click OK. Click the link to go to a related topic: Sign On, Control Panel, Disable/Enable Formula Calculations or Reset Host Server Connection. Global Software, Inc.

202 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 SAP Ledger Specifics Use the table to enter data on the Settings - Ledger Specifics - SAP panel. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the SS Settings section to review generic processing fields. Field Description SAP Options: SAP Logon INI Location When the SAP Adapter is not being used to log onto the database, key the path or use the Browse button to select the location of the SAP logon INI file. Language (SPRAS) Specify the language ID to be used for all descriptions. Client Specify the SAP client number. This value is updated during signon. Use SAP Login Dialog If selected, the standard SAP login procedure is used for signing onto Spreadsheet Server. Otherwise, Global's standard Sign On to Spreadsheet Server dialog box is used. Use SAP Adapter RFC's If selected, the connection process uses the standard SAP GUI signon process. Otherwise, direct connection to the database is used. Limit Segment Lookup Results If selected, the number of segment records loaded during a segment value to nnnn Records lookup (i.e. when click the ellipse button for an account segment on the Build a Template or Control Panel panel) is limited by the number of records specified. Authorized Companies Displays a list of companies to which the current user is authorized. These values are updated during signon. Currency Precisions Displays a list of each currency setup within SAP and its' applicable currency precision. These values are updated during signon. Note: The Settings - Ledger Specifics - SAP - Special Ledgers panel is used to maintain processing criteria for special SAP ledgers. This panel is password protected. Contact Global for more information. Click the link to go to a related topic: SS Settings.

203 GL Reporting SAP Build a Template for GXL As fields on the Build a Template - GXL panel vary based upon the selected ledger, use the table to enter data unique for an SAP ledger. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the Build a Template section to review generic processing fields. Field Description Ledger Click the down arrow and select the ledger. Valid values are FI, CO, COOR, PCA and special SAP ledgers. Use the drop down list to select the appropriate value. After selecting a value, the system changes the account segments and valid currency types on the panel to match the selected ledger. Currency Type Click the down arrow and select the currency type. Valid values vary based upon the ledger selected. If ledger = FI, valid values are TRANS, LOCAL, and GROUP. If ledger = CO or COOR, valid values are TRANS, OBJECT, COAREA, PV, TOTALQTY, and FIXEDQTY. If ledger = PCA, valid values are TRANS, LOCAL, GROUP, and QTY. Year Click the down arrow and select the reporting year. Format Click the down arrow and select the time range for which to retrieve data. Valid formats are PER, QTR, YTD, LTD, and RANGE. Period Click the down arrow and select the corresponding period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e. 1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format. Configuration Click the down arrow and select the host configuration to be used. The list only displays configurations to which the user is authorized. If left blank, the system uses the default configuration as defined in the Configurator. Click the link to go to a related topic: Build a Template. Global Software, Inc.

204 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 SAP GXL Use the GXL formula to retrieve account balances for a specific format/reporting period. The following is an overview for the GXL formula for a SAP ledger. Syntax: =GXL("Ledger","Currency Type","Key 3","Year","Format","Period","Account Segment 1","Account Segment 2","Account Segment 3","Account Segment 4","Account Segment 5"...) Note: It is most common to use cell references within GXL formulas to identify parameters. Parameters: Ledger Identifies the specific ledger in SAP. Valid values are FI, CO, COOR, PCA and special SAP ledgers. Currency Type Identifies the currency type. Ledger Valid Values FI TRANS, LOCAL, GROUP CO TRANS, OBJECT, COAREA, PV, TOTALQTY, FIXEDQTY COOR TRANS, OBJECT, COAREA, PV, TOTALQTY, FIXEDQTY PCA TRANS, LOCAL, GROUP, QTY Key 3 Optionally identifies host configuration criteria. Enter the necessary literal and a value as defined below. If more than one variable needs to be defined, separate the variables by a semi-colon. Enter 0 or leave blank if not used. Enter the literal "CONFIGURATION=X" where X is either the full configuration name or just the number. If left blank, the system uses the default configuration as defined in the Configurator. Year Year identifier. Format Format options are: PER Activity for the selected period QTR Activity for the periods included in the selected quarter number YTD Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number excluding the opening balance LTD Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number including the opening balance RANGE Activity for a range of periods specified Period Corresponds to period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e. 1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format. Account Segment 1 - nn Enter one parameter for each segment of the account string. The number of account segments will vary based upon the account structure for the selected ledger. May be a single value, mask, range, value list, segment list, hierarchy value field (see Account Segment Syntax).

205 GL Reporting 197 Ledger Valid Segments FI Type, Chart of Accounts, Plan Version, Currency Code, Company, Account, Business Area CO Chart of Accounts, Plan Version, Currency Code, Value Type, Controlling Area, Cost Center, Cost Element, Activity COOR Chart of Accounts, Plan Version, Currency Code, Value Type, Controlling Area, Order Number, Cost Element PCA Type, Chart of Accounts, Plan Version, Currency Code, Company, Profit Center, Function Area, Controlling Area, Account Type - valid values are 0 (Actual) and 1 (Plan) Plan Version - use 000 if actual results are desired Formula Example - FI Ledger - Using a Value List, Range and Mask: =GXL("FI","TRANS","CONFIGURATION=SAP 1 - Prod","1999","PER","1","0","1000","000","DEM","[1000,2000]", " ","*") Retrieves the actual balance for period 1 of 1999 for companies 1000 and 2000, accounts in the range of thru , and all business areas. Formula Example - CO Ledger - Using Single Values: =GXL("CO","TRANS","CONFIGURATION=SAP 1 - Prod","1999","PER","1","INT","000","DEM","01","1000","2000", "435000","100") Retrieves the actual balance for period 1 of 1999 for controlling area 1000, cost center 2000, cost element and activity 100. Global Software, Inc.

206 198 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Formula Example - COOR Ledger - Using Single Values: =GXL("COOR","TRANS","CONFIGURATION=1","2003","PER","2","1000","000","USD","01","1000"," ", " ") Retrieves the actual balance for period 2 of 2003 for controlling area 1000, order number and cost element Formula Example - PCA Ledger - Using a Value List, Masks and a Range: =GXL("PCA","TRANS","CONFIGURATION=1","2007","PER","1","0","1000","000","DEM","2000","9999","100","1000", "800000") Retrieves the actual balance for period 1 of 2007 for company 2000, profit centers 5000 and 9999, all function areas, range of controlling areas from 1000 thru 2500, and accounts that begin with 80. Click the link to go to a related topic: Control Panel, GL Reporting, Formula Assistant or GXL Formula for Account Values.

207 GL Reporting SAP GXD For a SAP ledger, the GXD formula is used to retrieve a description for a single account segment (i.e. account, cost center, internal order, profit center). Syntax: =GXD("Descriptions","Parm 1","Parm 2","Parm 3") Note: It is most common to use cell references within GXD formulas to identify parameters. Parameters: Descriptions Identifies the segment type for which to retrieve a description. Valid values are Account (ACCOUNT), Cost Center (CC), Internal Order (IO), and Profit Center (PC). Parm 1 If description is Account (ACCOUNT), identifies the chart of accounts. If description is Cost Center (CC) or Profit Center (PC), identifies the controlling area. If description is Internal Order (IO), then leave the field blank. Parm 2 Identifies the value of the account, cost center, order number, or profit center for which to retrieve the description. Parm 3 Optionally, identifies the host configuration from which to retrieve the description. May specify either the full configuration name or just the number. If left blank, the system uses the default configuration as defined in the Configurator. Formula Example - Retrieve an Account Description: =GXD("ACCOUNT","INT","430000","SAP 1 - Prod") Retrieves the description for account from the INT chart of accounts. Global Software, Inc.

208 200 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Formula Example - Retrieve a Cost Center Description: =GXD("CC","1000","1200","SAP 1 - Prod") Retrieves the description for cost center 1200 from the 1000 controlling area. Formula Example - Retrieve an Internal Order Description: =GXD("IO",,"702267","SAP 1 - Prod") Retrieves the description for internal order Formula Example - Retrieve a Profit Center Description: =GXD("PC","1000","1010","SAP 1 - Prod") Retrieves the description for profit center 1010 from the 1000 controlling area. Click the link to go to a related topic: GL Reporting or Formula Assistant.

209 Query Query Summary of Query Formulas for Excel Spreadsheet Server retrieves data from the assigned database into Excel using the following formulas: Formula Description GEXQ Returns a single value from the GEXQ (summary) portion of the query into the spreadsheet. This value may be "drilled down" upon to see the detailed results in a drill down panel or on a worksheet (see GEXQ Formulas). GEXD Inserts query detail results onto the spreadsheet (see GEXD Formulas). GEXS Opens a selector panel with the values returned from the query (see GEXS Formulas). GEXI Opens the detail portion of the query and displays results in a drill down panel or on a worksheet (see GEXI Formulas). Note: Formulas available for processing are based upon the user's licensed features. See GL Reporting for GL related formulas. These formulas can be used in a spreadsheet cell in the same manner as other spreadsheet functions. Spreadsheet Server provides tools for starting a spreadsheet (see Build a Template) and for entering formulas (see Formula Assistant). Setup Prior to using Query Formulas in Excel 1. Queries must exist in Query Designer or Query Exchange before they can be used in formulas in Excel. Use one of the following methods to create/add a query to Query Designer: Download a query from Query Exchange (see Download Queries from Query Exchange) Manually create a query in Query Designer (see Create a New Query) 2. Prior to using a new or modified query, in Excel from the SServer menu, select Refresh Queries -or- select the ribbon equivalent (see SS Ribbon). The system refreshes query data. Global Software, Inc.

210 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Build a Template for Queries Build a Template is a tool used to aid in quickly creating a template on a Spreadsheet Server spreadsheet. This tool populates the necessary rows and columns with required parameters as provided by the user. The tool inserts a GEXQ, GEXD, GEXS, or GEXI formula using the parameters. Note: Formulas available in the Build a Template function are based upon the user's licensed features. See Build a Template for GL related formulas. 1. In Excel from the SServer menu, select Build a Template. The Build a Template panel appears (opening to the last used formula/position/size). Nav Tip: This panel may also be accessed by pressing Shift+Ctrl+B -or- by selecting the ribbon equivalent (see SS Ribbon). 2. Select the desired formula on the Formulas fly out window. The selected formula panel appears. 3. Use the table to enter data on the Build a Template - GEXQ panel. Field Description GEXQ: Returns a single value from the GEXQ (summary) portion of the query into the spreadsheet (see GEXQ Formulas). Query Name Click the Open From File button ( to be executed. ) to navigate to and select the query Click the Search Online button ( ) to select and download the query to be executed (see Download Queries from Query Exchange). Total Field If the GEXQ summary field is to be defined within the formula, click the down arrow and select the field to be summarized. Note: Only fields assigned an alias appear in the drop down list. Total Type If the GEXQ summary field is to be defined within the formula, click the down arrow and select the summary type (i.e. SUM, COUNT, MIN, MAX).

211 Query Use the table to enter data on the Build a Template - GEXD panel. Field Description GEXD: Inserts query detail results onto the spreadsheet (see GEXD Formulas). Query Name Click the Open From File button ( to be executed. ) to navigate to and select the query Click the Search Online button ( ) to select and download the query to be executed (see Download Queries from Query Exchange). Worksheet Click the down arrow and select the worksheet destination for the output. Defaults the current active worksheet. Starting Cell/Range/Table Specify the upper-left corner of the output target. This value may be a single cell, a range or a table. If Include Column Headings is selected, then it represents the left-most column heading as defined in the query. Otherwise it represents the left-most cell of the first row of data. Fill Down Columns Specify the number of columns that contain formulas/values to the right of the results grid. These columns will fill down to match the number of records in the results. Valid values are 1, 2, 3, etc. Note: When using Fill Down Columns targeting a range the fill down formulas/values must reside outside of the output range. Note: When Include Column Heading is selected, the fill down columns are required to be on the first row following the headings. When Include Column Headings is not selected, the fill down columns are required to be on the first two rows for the GEXD data. Note: In some instances, the GEXD Row function may be used in place of fill down columns (see GEXD Row Function). Clear a Range of Cells Specify the range of cells to be cleared prior to executing the formula. Note: When using Fill Down Columns, exclude the first row from the clear range to avoid deleting the fill down formula/value (i.e. if the Starting Cell is A7, the Clear Range of Cells should be "A8:xx"). Include Column Headings If selected, the generated output data will contain column headings from the query. Do not select the option if column headings will be manually entered in Excel. Auto Fit Column Sizes If selected, the system performs the Auto Fit Column Width feature of Excel when the formula is executed. Global Software, Inc.

212 204 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Field Clear Sheet/Range/Table 6. Description If selected, the entire output sheet (specified in the Worksheet field) or the range or table (specified in the Starting Cell/Range/Table field) is cleared when the GEXD formula is executed. Do not select this option if the GEXD formula or any of the query parameters are located on the output sheet. Note: See Clear a Range of Cells for clearing a range of cell data. Use the table to enter data on the Build a Template - GEXS panel. Field Description GEXS: Opens a selector panel based upon query results (see GEXS Formulas). Query Name Click the Open From File button ( to be executed. ) to navigate to and select the query Click the Search Online button ( ) to select and download the query to be executed (see Download Queries from Query Exchange). 7. Selector Text Specify the label for the GEXS. Cell for Value Specify the cell destination for the selected query value(s). Use the table to enter data on the Build a Template - GEXI panel. Field Description GEXI: Displays query detail in a drill down panel (see GEXI Formulas). Query Name Click the Open From File button ( to be executed. ) to navigate to and select the query Click the Search Online button ( ) to select and download the query to be executed (see Download Queries from Query Exchange).

213 Query Use the table to enter data in the bottom section of the Build a Template - GEXQ, GEXD, GEXS or GEXI panel. Field Description Worksheet Click the down arrow and select the worksheet destination for the formula. Defaults the current active worksheet. Starting Column/Row Specify the starting column and row for the formula template. Use Absolute Cell References If selected, the system automatically locks both the column and row values of the query's parameter cell references. If not selected, the system only locks the column value when the parameter is assigned to a row or the row value when the parameter is assigned to a column. Line Description Specify a description to be assigned to the formula. This value is placed in the cell prior to the cell containing the formula. Clear Worksheet If selected, the target worksheet is cleared prior to inserting data. Do Not Clear Worksheet If selected, the target worksheet is not cleared prior to inserting data. Shift Worksheet Data If selected, the formula is inserted in the target cell and the parameter columns and rows are inserted to the top and to the left of the existing worksheet data. Parameters: The parameter related fields only appear when parameters have been specified in the selected query definition. Display/Use If selected, the query parameter is included in the formula. Row/Col Select the button to toggle between Row and Col. This button determines if the query parameter will be located on the row to the left of the formula or in a column above the formula. Value Key the value (i.e. single value, wildcard, list, range, or segment list) or click the ellipse button to execute the user defined "look up" query to select the value to default on the template for the query parameter (see Assign Query). After the appropriate data has been entered and verified, click one of the following toolbar icons or buttons. Insert (icon) -- inserts parameter labels and values and the formula to the selected worksheet, and keeps the panel open for additional inserts. Insert (button) -- inserts parameter labels and values and the formula to the selected worksheet and closes the panel. Close (button) -- closes the panel. Global Software, Inc.

214 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Formula Assistant for Queries The Formula Assistant is a tool used to aid in quickly creating formulas on a Spreadsheet Server spreadsheet. Note: Formulas available in the Formula Assistant function are based upon the user's licensed features. See Formula Assistant for GL related formulas. 1. In Excel from the SServer menu, select Formula Assistant. The Formula Assistant opens to the GXL or GEXQ panel -or- if Formula Assistant was launched while on a SS formula, the corresponding formula panel appears. Nav Tip: This panel may also be accessed by pressing Shift+Ctrl+F -or- by selecting the toolbar or ribbon equivalent (see SS Toolbar or SS Ribbon). 2. Select the desired formula on the Formulas fly out window. The selected formula panel appears. Note: For efficient processing use cell references to identify individual query parameters. However, if literal values are k eyed in the entry boxes, they must be placed in double quotes ("). Hint: Shortcut for selecting cell references: On the Formula Assistant panel, select the desired field. Press the Control Key. The Formula Assistant panel becomes transparent and is shifted up. On the worksheet, select the desired cell. Press the Control Key or click the Expand button. This system returns the selected cell to the field. Hint: If necessary, use F4 to lock either the row and/or column value of the cell reference.

215 Query Use the table to enter data on the Formula Assistant - GEXQ panel. Field Description GEXQ: Returns a single value from the GEXQ (summary) portion of the query into the spreadsheet (see GEXQ Formulas). Query Name Click the Open From File button ( to be executed. ) to navigate to and select the query Click the Search Online button ( ) to select and download the query to be executed (see Download Queries from Query Exchange). Total Field If the GEXQ summary field is to be defined within the formula, click the down arrow and select the field to be summarized. Note: Only fields assigned an alias appear in the drop down list. Total Type If the GEXQ summary field is to be defined within the formula, click the down arrow and select the summary type (i.e. SUM, COUNT, MIN, MAX). Query Parameters If applicable, specify the cells containing the query parameters. This area assumes that the parameters will be on a row next to each other, so entering a value and clicking the down arrow will populate the rest of the fields (i.e. first parameter cell reference is A13, then clicking the down arrow for the parameter populates the following fields with B13, C13, etc.). Note: Values to be entered in the GEXQ formula will vary based upon whether the GEXQ summary field is defined in the query or the formula. Global Software, Inc.

216 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Use the table to enter data on the Formula Assistant - GEXD panel. Field Description GEXD: Inserts query detail results onto the spreadsheet (see GEXD Formulas). Query Name Click the Open From File button ( to be executed. ) to navigate to and select the query Click the Search Online button ( ) to select and download the query to be executed (see Download Queries from Query Exchange). Worksheet Click the down arrow and select the worksheet destination for the output. Defaults the current active worksheet. Starting Cell/Range/Table Specify the upper-left corner of the output target. This value may be a single cell, a range or a table. If Include Column Headings is selected, then it represents the left-most column heading as defined in the query. Otherwise it represents the left-most cell of the first row of data. Fill Down Columns Specify the number of columns that contain formulas/values to the right of the results grid. These columns will fill down to match the number of records in the results. Valid values are 1, 2, 3, etc. Note: When using Fill Down Columns targeting a range the fill down formulas/values must reside outside of the output range. Note: When Include Column Heading is selected, the fill down columns are required to be on the first row following the headings. When Include Column Headings is not selected, the fill down columns are required to be on the first two rows for the GEXD data. Note: In some instances, the GEXD Row function may be used in place of fill down columns (see GEXD Row Function). Clear a Range of Cells Specify the range of cells to be cleared prior to executing the formula. Note: When using Fill Down Columns, exclude the first row from the clear range to avoid deleting the fill down formula/value (i.e. if the Starting Cell is A7, the Clear Range of Cells should be "A8:xx"). Include Column Headings If selected, the generated output data will contain column headings from the query. Do not select the option if column headings will be manually entered in Excel. Auto Fit Column Sizes If selected, the system performs the Auto Fit Column Width feature of Excel when the formula is executed. Clear Sheet/Range/Table If selected, the entire output sheet (specified in the Worksheet field) or the range or table (specified in the Starting Cell/Range/Table field) is cleared when the GEXD formula is executed. Do not select this option if the GEXD formula or any of the query parameters are located on the output sheet. Note: See Clear a Range of Cells for clearing a range of cell data. Query Parameters If applicable, specify the cells containing the query parameters. This area assumes that the parameters will be on a row next to each other, so entering a value and clicking the down arrow will populate the rest of the fields (i.e. first parameter cell reference is A13, then clicking the down arrow for the parameter populates the following fields with B13, C13, etc.).

217 Query Use the table to enter data on the Formula Assistant - GEXS panel. Field Description GEXS: Opens a selector panel with the values returned from the query (see GEXS Formulas). Query Name Click the Open From File button ( to be executed. ) to navigate to and select the query Click the Search Online button ( ) to select and download the query to be executed (see Download Queries from Query Exchange). Selector Text Specify the label for the GEXS. Cell for Value Specify the cell destination for the selected query value(s). Query Parameters If applicable, specify the cells containing the query parameters. This area assumes that the parameters will be on a row next to each other, so entering a value and clicking the down arrow will populate the rest of the fields (i.e. first parameter cell reference is A13, then clicking the down arrow for the parameter populates the following fields with B13, C13, etc.). Global Software, Inc.

218 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Use the table to enter data on the Formula Assistant - GEXI panel. Field Description GEXI: Opens the detail portion of the query and displays it in a drill down panel (see GEXI Formulas). Query Name Click the Open From File button ( to be executed. ) to navigate to and select the query Click the Search Online button ( ) to select and download the query to be executed (see Download Queries from Query Exchange). Query Parameters 7. If applicable, specify the cells containing the query parameters. This area assumes that the parameters will be on a row next to each other, so entering a value and clicking the down arrow will populate the rest of the fields (i.e. first parameter cell reference is A13, then clicking the down arrow for the parameter populates the following fields with B13, C13, etc.). The Results Box near the bottom left of the panel displays the formula as it is being built. Verify the data in the Results Box is correct, and then click one of the following toolbar icons or buttons. Insert (icon) or Insert (button) -- inserts the formula to the previously selected cell on the current worksheet and closes the panel. Copy (icon) -- copies the formula to the Windows clipboard. Cancel (button) -- closes the panel.

219 Query GEXQ Formula The GEXQ formula is used to return a single value from the GEXQ (summary) portion of a query into a spreadsheet. A user may drill down upon the summary value to see detailed results. The drill down results can appear in a single panel, tabbed panel or worksheet based upon options in the user's settings and how the drill down function is executed. Note: A SHELL Statement may be added to the query to launch an external program in replace of query detail as part of the drill down (see SQL SHELL Function). 1. In Excel, select the cell where the formula is to reside. 2. From the SServer menu, select Formula Assistant. The Formula Assistant panel appears. Select the appropriate formula (GEXQ) on the Formulas fly out window. Nav Tip: This panel may also be accessed by selecting the toolbar or ribbon equivalent (see SS Toolbar or SS Ribbon). 3. Use the table to enter data on the Formula Assistant - GEXQ panel. Field Query Name Description Click the Open From File button ( to be executed. ) to navigate to and select the query Click the Search Online button ( ) to select and download the query to be executed (see Download Queries from Query Exchange). Total Field Global Software, Inc. If the GEXQ summary field is to be defined within the formula, click the down arrow and select the field to be summarized. Note: Only fields assigned an alias appear in the drop down list.

220 212 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Field Description Total Type If the GEXQ summary field is to be defined within the formula, click the down arrow and select the summary type (i.e. SUM, COUNT, MIN, MAX). Query Parameters If applicable, specify the cells containing the query parameters. This area assumes that the parameters will be on a row next to each other, so entering a value and clicking the down arrow will populate the rest of the fields (i.e. first parameter cell reference is A13, then clicking the down arrow for the parameter populates the following fields with B13, C13, etc.). Note: Values to be entered in the GEXQ formula will vary based upon whether the GEXQ summary field is defined in the query or the formula. Example 1 - GEXQ Summary Field Defined in the Query: See Create the GEXQ Field for more information on creating the GEXQ summary field in the Query Designer. Example 2 - GEXQ Summary Field Defined in the Formula Assistant:

221 Query Click Insert. The formula is inserted into the cell and the summary portion of the query in the GEXQ formula is immediately executed. The true formula (GEXQ(...)) can be seen in the Excel formula bar. 5. Copy the GEXQ formula to the appropriate destination cells. Note: If the GEXQ formula is used in conjunction with data generated via an GEXD formula and is in an adjacent column, use the GEXD Fill Down Column feature to copy the GEXQ formula to the same number of rows generated by the GEXD formula (see GEXD formulas). 6. To view detail records underlying an GEXQ summary value, select the cell containing the GEXQ formula, then right click and select Spreadsheet Server>Drill Down -or- select the menu, toolbar or ribbon equivalent (see SServer Menu, SS Toolbar or SS Ribbon). The Drill Down panel appears displaying the detail records for the GEXQ summary value or the data is pushed to a worksheet. Global Software, Inc.

222 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 GEXD Formula The GEXD formula is used to directly insert the detail results of a query into a spreadsheet. Note: See GEXD Limit to define the maximum the number of query output records in Excel. 1. In Excel, select the cell where the formula is to reside. 2. From the SServer menu, select Formula Assistant. The Formula Assistant panel appears. Select the appropriate formula (GEXD) on the Formulas fly out window. Nav Tip: This panel may also be accessed by selecting the toolbar or ribbon equivalent (see SS Toolbar or SS Ribbon). 3. Use the table to enter data on the Formula Assistant - GEXD panel. Field Query Name Description Click the Open From File button ( to be executed. ) to navigate to and select the query Click the Search Online button ( ) to select and download the query to be executed (see Download Queries from Query Exchange). Worksheet Click the down arrow and select the worksheet destination for the output. Defaults the current active worksheet.

223 Query Field Description Starting Cell/Range/Table Specify the upper-left corner of the output target. This value may be a single cell, a range or a table. If Include Column Headings is selected, then it represents the left-most column heading as defined in the query. Otherwise it represents the left-most cell of the first row of data. Fill Down Columns Specify the number of columns that contain formulas/values to the right of the results grid. These columns will fill down to match the number of records in the results. Valid values are 1, 2, 3, etc. Note: When using Fill Down Columns targeting a range the fill down formulas/values must reside outside of the output range. Note: When Include Column Heading is selected, the fill down columns are required to be on the first row following the headings. When Include Column Headings is not selected, the fill down columns are required to be on the first two rows for the GEXD data. Note: In some instances, the GEXD Row function may be used in place of fill down columns (see GEXD Row Function). Clear a Range of Cells Specify the range of cells to be cleared prior to executing the formula. Note: When using Fill Down Columns, exclude the first row from the clear range to avoid deleting the fill down formula/value (i.e. if the Starting Cell is A7, the Clear Range of Cells should be "A8:xx"). Include Column Headings If selected, the generated output data will contain column headings from the query. Do not select the option if column headings will be manually entered in Excel. Auto Fit Column Sizes If selected, the system performs the Auto Fit Column Width feature of Excel when the formula is executed. Clear Sheet/Range/Table If selected, the entire output sheet (specified in the Worksheet field) or the range or table (specified in the Starting Cell/Range/Table field) is cleared when the GEXD formula is executed. Do not select this option if the GEXD formula or any of the query parameters are located on the output sheet. Note: See Clear a Range of Cells for clearing a range of cell data. Query Parameters If applicable, specify the cells containing the query parameters. This area assumes that the parameters will be on a row next to each other, so entering a value and clicking the down arrow will populate the rest of the fields (i.e. first parameter cell reference is A13, then clicking the down arrow for the parameter populates the following fields with B13, C13, etc.). Click Insert. The formula is inserted into the cell and a label (GenQueryDetail...) appears in the cell. The true formula (GEXD(...)) can be seen in the Excel formula bar. Global Software, Inc.

224 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 To generate detail reports for all GEXD formulas in the workbook, in Excel from the SServer menu select Generate All Detail Reports (GEXD) -or- select the ribbon equivalent (see SS Ribbon). The results for all GEXD formulas are expanded into the appropriate formatted sheets. To generate a detail report for a single GEXD formula, select the cell containing the GEXD formula, right click and select Spreadsheet Server>Generate This Detail Report (GEXD) -or- select the ribbon equivalent (see SS Ribbon). The results for the selected GEXD formula are expanded into the appropriate formatted sheet.

225 Query GEXD Targeting a Cell The following example demonstrates targeting a cell as the Starting Cell/Range/Table value. 1. Initial Excel setup for the example: Cell A1 - identifies the user-defined report name (i.e. OPEN INVOICES BY VENDOR). Cell A3 - user-assigned literal, indicating what the parameter value represents (i.e. Vendor #). Cell A4 - identifies the parameter value needed to execute the GEXD (i.e. 459). Cell B4 - user-assigned literal, indicating what type of formula will be used (i.e. GEXD Formula). Cell C4 - location where the GEXD formula will reside. Cells A6-H6 - represents report headers (manually entered in this example). Cells A7-G7 - represents the first row of output data. Cell H7 - identifies the fill down column formula (i.e. D7*.09). 2. Setup on the Formula Assistant - GEXD tab: Query Name - use the Open From File button to select the query (i.e. AP Open Invoices). Worksheet - use the drop down list to select the worksheet for the output (i.e. Sheet7). Starting Cell/Range/Table - indicates the starting cell for the output data (i.e. A7). Fill Down Column - indicates the number of fill down columns at the end of the output data (i.e. 1). Include Column Headings - indicates whether or not the GEXD formula output data retrieves headings from the query. Not selected in this example as the headings have previously been keyed on the worksheet. Clear a Range of Cells - indicates the area of output data to be cleared prior to executing the GEXD formula. As this example contain a fill down column (i.e. H7), the clear range starts on the second row of output data (i.e. A8:H500), allowing the fill down formula to remain for future executions of the GEXD. Parameters (Vendor #) - indicates the cell on the worksheet where the query parameter resides (i.e. A4). Global Software, Inc.

226 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 The completed worksheet after GEXD execution:

227 Query GEXD Targeting a Range The following example demonstrates targeting a range as the Starting Cell/Range/Table value. 1. Initial Excel setup for the example: Cell A1 - identifies the user-defined report name (i.e. OPEN INVOICES BY VENDOR). Cell A3 - user-assigned literal, indicating what the parameter value represents (i.e. Vendor #). Cell A4 - identifies the parameter value needed to execute the GEXD (i.e. 459). Cell B4 - user-assigned literal, indicating what type of formula will be used (i.e. GEXD Formula). Cell C4 - location where the GEXD formula will reside. Cells A6-H6 - represents report headers (manually entered in this example). Cells A7-G7 - a range was created in Excel for these cells and the range was named GEXDTargetRange. Cell H7 - contains a formula (i.e. D7*.09) which will automatically be filled down based upon the rows in the range when the GEXD is generated. This column MUST be directly to the right of the range. 2. Setup on the Formula Assistant - GEXD tab: Query Name - use the Open From File button to select the query (i.e. AP Open Invoices). Worksheet - use the drop down list to select the worksheet for the output (i.e. Sheet5). Starting Cell/Range/Table - indicates the name of the range for the output data (i.e. GEXDTargetRange). Fill Down Column - indicates the number of fill down columns at the end of the output data (i.e. 1). Include Column Headings - indicates whether or not the GEXD formula output data retrieves headings from the query. Not selected in this example as the headings have previously been keyed on the worksheet. Clear Sheet/Range/Table - indicates whether or not to clear the range of output data prior to executing the GEXD formula. Selected in this example. Parameters (Vendor #) - indicates the cell on the worksheet where the query parameter resides (i.e. A4). Global Software, Inc.

228 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 The completed worksheet after GEXD execution:

229 Query GEXD Targeting a Table The following example demonstrates targeting a table as the Starting Cell/Range/Table value. 1. Initial Excel setup for the example: Cell A1 - identifies the user-defined report name (i.e. OPEN INVOICES BY VENDOR). Cell A3 - user-assigned literal, indicating what the parameter value represents (i.e. Vendor #). Cell A4 - identifies the parameter value needed to execute the GEXD (i.e. 459). Cell B4 - user-assigned literal, indicating what type of formula will be used (i.e. GEXD Formula). Cell C4 - location where the GEXD formula will reside. Cells A6-H6 - represents report headers (manually entered in this example). Cells A6-H7 - a range was created in Excel for these cells and the range was named GEXDTargetTable. Cell H7 - contains a formula (i.e. D7*.09) which will automatically be filled down based upon the rows in the range when the GEXD is generated. This column is in the table. 2. Setup on the Formula Assistant - GEXD tab: Query Name - use the Open From File button to select the query (i.e. AP Open Invoices). Worksheet - use the drop down list to select the worksheet for the output (i.e. Sheet6). Starting Cell/Range/Table - indicates the name of the table for the output data (i.e. GEXDTargetTable). Fill Down Column - indicates the number of fill down columns at the end of the output data (i.e. 1). Include Column Headings - indicates whether or not the GEXD formula output data retrieves headings from the query. Not selected in this example as the headings have previously been keyed on the worksheet. Clear Sheet/Range/Table - indicates whether or not to clear the range of output data prior to executing the GEXD formula. Selected in this example. Parameters (Vendor #) - indicates the cell on the worksheet where the query parameter resides (i.e. A4). Global Software, Inc.

230 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 The completed worksheet after GEXD execution:

231 Query GEXS Formula The GEXS formula opens a selector panel with the values returned from the specified query. Selected values from the first column are then returned to Excel. 1. In Excel, select the cell where the formula is to reside (typically adjacent to the Cell for Value). 2. From the SServer menu, select Formula Assistant. The Formula Assistant panel appears. Select the appropriate formula (GEXS) on the Formulas fly out window. Nav Tip: This panel may also be accessed by selecting the toolbar or ribbon equivalent (see SS Toolbar or SS Ribbon). 3. Use the table to enter data on the Formula Assistant - GEXS panel. Field Query Name Description Click the Open From File button ( to be executed. ) to navigate to and select the query Click the Search Online button ( ) to select and download the query to be executed (see Download Queries from Query Exchange). Selector Text Specify the label for the GEXS. Cell for Value Specify the cell destination for the selected query value(s). Query Parameters If applicable, specify the cells containing the query parameters. This area assumes that the parameters will be on a row next to each other, so entering a value and clicking the down arrow will populate the rest of the fields (i.e. first parameter cell reference is A13, then clicking the down arrow for the parameter populates the following fields with B13, C13, etc.). Global Software, Inc.

232 224 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M Click Insert. The formula is inserted into the cell and the specified Selector Text appears in the cell. The true formula (GEXS(...)) can be seen in the Excel formula bar. 5. To execute the GEXS formula, select the cell containing the GEXS formula, then right click and select Spreadsheet Server>Drill Down -or- select the menu, toolbar or ribbon equivalent (see SServer Menu, SS Toolbar or SS Ribbon). The Select Item panel appears. 6. Data in the list may be filtered, re-sorted and/or rearranged as necessary. To filter data -- enter a value in the appropriate column filter. Alphanumeric fields filter character by character. Numeric fields filter upon entry of the full field value. To re-sort data -- click the column heading to re-sort a column in ascending order. Click the column heading a second time to re-sort the column in descending order. To move a column -- click and hold on the desired column header, then drag and drop the column right or left to the desired position. Note: Column order is important, as only the first column of selected data will be inserted in the formula.

233 Query On the Select Item panel, specify the appropriate Parameter Type and then select the desired value(s): To select a single value -- double click the value -or- select the value and click Insert Selected Value(s). The selected value is returned to the Cell for Value cell on the spreadsheet. To select multiple values -- press and hold the Ctrl key as values are selected. Click the Insert Selected Value (s) button. The selected values are returned to the Cell for Value cell on the spreadsheet. To select multiple values in a range -- select the first value in the range, press and hold the Shift key, and then select the last value in the range. Click the Insert Selected Value(s) button. The selected values are returned to the Cell for Value cell on the spreadsheet. Example 1: Multiple values for a field to be used by a Smart Parm are selected, and the Insert Selected Value(s) button is selected. Global Software, Inc.

234 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Explore Similar to the GEXS formula, the Explore feature is used to open a selector panel with the values returned from the specified query. Selected values from the first column are then returned to the active cell in Excel. The Explore feature differs from a GEXS formula, as no actual formula resides on the spreadsheet. In addition, queries (EDQs) available for processing from the Explore feature must reside in a specific location. To Setup: 1. Ensure a folder labeled, Explore, exists in the root of the user's EDQ location. 2. In Query Designer, create the desired queries and save them in the Explore folder. To Process: 1. In Excel from the ribbon select Explore. The system lists the available queries located in the Explore folder. Note: Only the first fifteen (15) queries located in the root of the Explore folder are listed. Only the first ten (10) sub-folders located in the Explore folder are listed. Only the first ten (10) queries located in a sub-folder are listed. No second level sub-folders are listed. 2. Navigate to and select the desired query. The Select Item panel appears. 3. On the Select Item panel, select the desired value(s) and click Insert Selected Value(s). The selected values are returned to the active cell on the spreadsheet.

235 Query GEXI Formula The GEXI formula is used to display the detail results of a query. The results can appear in a single panel, tabbed panel or worksheet based upon options in the user's settings and how the drill down function is executed. 1. In Excel, select the cell where the formula is to reside. 2. From the SServer menu, select Formula Assistant. The Formula Assistant panel appears. Select the appropriate formula (GEXI) on the Formulas fly out window. Nav Tip: This panel may also be accessed by selecting the toolbar or ribbon equivalent (see SS Toolbar or SS Ribbon). 3. Use the table to enter data on the Formula Assistant - GEXI panel. Field Query Name Description Click the Open From File button ( to be executed. ) to navigate to and select the query Click the Search Online button ( ) to select and download the query to be executed (see Download Queries from Query Exchange). Query Parameters Global Software, Inc. If applicable, specify the cells containing the query parameters. This area assumes that the parameters will be on a row next to each other, so entering a value and clicking the down arrow will populate the rest of the fields (i.e. first parameter cell reference is A13, then clicking the down arrow for the parameter populates the following fields with B13, C13, etc.).

236 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Click Insert. The formula is inserted into the cell and the GEXI indicator (i.e.???) appears in the cell. The true formula (GEXI(...)) can be seen in the Excel formula bar. Note: The GEXI indicator value used is determined by an application setting in the Configurator. 5. Copy the GEXI formula to the appropriate destination cells. Note: If the GEXI formula is used in conjunction with data generated via an GEXD formula and is in an adjacent column, use the GEXD Fill Down Column feature to copy the GEXI formula to the same number of rows generated by the GEXD formula (see GEXD formulas). 6. To view detail records for the specified query, select the cell containing the GEXI formula, then right click and select Spreadsheet Server>Drill Down -or- select the menu, toolbar or ribbon equivalent (see SServer Menu, SS Toolbar or SS Ribbon). The Drill Down panel appears displaying the detail records for the query or the data is pushed to a worksheet.

237 Query Global Software, Inc. 229

238 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Download Queries from Query Exchange Query Exchange is an online depository of queries. Query Designer allows the user to access the online query depository, download selected queries to the Query Designer and then utilize them in Excel. Query Exchange may be accessed from within either Query Designer or Excel. A user's ability to access Query Exchange is determined by a user setting in the Configurator. Note: Must be connected to the internet to have access to the Query Exchange component. To Download a Query from Query Exchange: 1. From within Query Designer: In Query Designer from the Ribbon, select Home>Search Online. Query Exchange opens. From within Excel: In Excel, access either the Build a Template or Formula Assistant panel and select the appropriate GEXQ, GEXD, GEXS or GEXI formula or tab. Click the Search Online button ( 2. ). Query Exchange opens. Select and/or key the appropriate search criteria and click Search -or- click Advanced Search, enter the appropriate search criteria and click the Advanced Search button. The system lists all queries matching the search criteria.

239 Query To download: A single query -- click the Install Query icon ( ) next to the desired query. The Save As panel appears. Note: The Select a Connection panel appears prior to the Save As panel if the connection associated with the selected query does not exist in the Configurator, allowing the user to select a connection to be assigned to the query. Multiple queries -- select the appropriate check box(es) and click Download Selected Items. The Browse for Folder panel appears. 4. On the Save As or Browse for Folder panels, if necessary navigate to a different folder location and/or change the file name, then click Save or OK. The Query Retrieved panel appears confirming that the query(ies) has been saved to Query Designer. 5. On the Query Retrieved panel, click OK. Query Exchange reappears, allowing the user to select another query for downloading. 6. Repeat steps 2-5 as necessary to download additional queries. 7. When all queries have been downloaded, click the X to close Query Exchange. If Query Exchange was accessed from Query Designer, then Query Designer reappears and opens the last query downloaded via the Install Query icon. If Query Exchange was accessed from Build a Template or Formula Assistant panels in Excel, then the original panel reappears and defaults the name of the last query downloaded via the Install Query icon in the Query Name field. Note: Refer to GEXD Formulas, GEXQ Formulas, GEXI Formulas, and GEXS Formulas for the steps required to complete a formula. Global Software, Inc.

240 232 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 9 Query Designer 9.1 Query Designer Architecture The Query Designer is a visual tool which allows the user to design, maintain, and run queries. The following chapter gives an overview of the various parts of the Query Designer, and describes the basic navigation. 1. From the desktop, select Start>Programs>Global Software Spreadsheet Server>Query Designer. The Query Designer panel appears.

241 Query Designer Ribbon Menu The Query Designer's many functions are accessed via a Ribbon menu. Menu Item Description Globe Button: Menu used to create, open, close and save queries. New Closes any open query and begins the process to create a new query (see Create a New Query). Open Query Opens a browser panel, allowing the user to locate a query anywhere on the network. Close Query Closes the active query. Save Query Saves the active query. The first time a new query is saved the Save As dialog box appears (see Save the Query for the First Time). Save As Saves the active query to a different target location and/or file name. Exit Exits the Query Designer application. Recent Documents Lists recent queries previously opened in the Query Designer. Click on a query in the list to reopen the query. Quick Access Toolbar: Opens a browser panel, allowing the user to locate a query anywhere on the network. Saves the active query. The first time a new query is saved the Save As dialog box appears. Closes the active query. Global Software, Inc.

242 234 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Menu Item Description Home Tab: Main menu used to maintain and execute queries. Add Table Allows the user to add an available table from the current connection (see Add Tables). Add Parameter Allows the user to define a parameter to be utilized as field criteria (see Standard Parameters in the Query Designer). GEXD Limit Specifies the number of records to be returned in Excel when a GEXD formula is generated (see GEXD Limit). Change Connection Allows the user to change the connection for the selected query. Definition Copies the open query definition to Notepad. This is useful for documenting queries (see Textual Query Definition). Lib= Defines the library of the active query. Un-Locked / Locked Locks or unlocks, based upon the current query status, the query to prevent modification of the query. Save Query Saves the active query. The first time a new query is saved the Save As dialog box appears. Close Query Closes the active query. All Records Executes the active query and returns all records. Note: Press F5 as a shortcut to execute all records for the query. 1,000 Records Executes the active query and returns the first 1000 records. Single Record Executes the active query and returns the first record. Prompted Executes the active query and returns a prompted number or records. Execute GEDQ Executes the select statement only portion of the query. Abort Aborts the currently active executing query. Explorer File System Displays queries located in the EDQ file repository directory location as defined in the Settings (see Explorer File System Panel). Query View Returns the top left panel to the open query's table view (see Query View Panel). Publish Publishes the query to Global's online query depository, Query Exchange. The user is prompted to key a query description if one is not currently assigned. Global reviews all published queries prior to promoting them to Query Exchange. Search Online Goes to Global's online query depository, Query Exchange, allowing the user to download queries to Query Designer (see Download Queries from Query Exchange). Connection Tab: Menu used to manage active connections. View Opens the Connections panel, allowing the user to view and test connections to which the user is authorized (see Connections). Disconnect All Open Connections Disconnects all open connections. Update Query Connections Opens the Update Query Connections panel, allowing the user to mass change the original connection assigned to queries to a new connection (see Update Query Connections).

243 Query Designer 235 Menu Item Description File System Tab: Menu used to manage queries located in the EDQ file repository. Note: This menu is only available when the Explorer File System option is selected on the Home menu. Clone Copies the selected query. Delete Deletes the selected query. Upgrade EDQs for File System Converts EDQ files from the Query Catalog to the Explorer File System. View Tab: Menu used to modify QD settings, and to access Ad Hoc Queries and other reporting functions. SQL Font Defines the font used in the SQL Text panel. Font Size Defines the font size used in SQL Text panel. Decrease Spacing Decreases the spacing in the tables on the Query View panel. Increase Spacing Increases the spacing in the tables on the Query View panel. Legacy Ad Hoc Queries Opens the Legacy Ad Hoc Queries panel, allowing the user to view preexisting ad hocs (see Legacy Ad Hoc Queries). Report Designer Opens the Report Designer panel, allowing the user to create and maintain user designed reports. View Report Previews query driven designed reports. View Log File Opens the Log Viewer panel, where the user may view information and error log entries, copy selected log entries, or clear the log file (see QD View Log). Settings Opens the Settings panel, allowing the user to defined various criteria to control processing (see QD Settings). Global Software, Inc.

244 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Explorer File System Panel The Explorer File System panel is a view of the default folder and subdirectories for EDQ files, and the query (EDQ) files located within the directories. An option in the SS Settings defines the default folder and an option in the QD Settings limits the fields displayed on the panel (see QD Settings). 1. In Query Designer from the Ribbon, select Home>Explorer File System. The Explorer File System panel appears. 2. Use the table to reference the contents on the Explorer File System panel. 3. Field Description Explorer File System View Directory Tree Displays the default folder and subdirectories for query (EDQ) files, as defined in the SS Settings. Name File name for the query (EDQ). Description User defined query description. Connection Connection used by the query. SmartPak SmartPak grouping value for the query. Size File size of the query. Modified Date and time the query was last modified. Modified By User ID of the last user who modified the query. Use the table to reference available functions on the Explorer File System panel. Function Description Open Query To open a query, double click the query name. The Query View panel appears (see Query View Panel). Re-size / Hide Columns To re-size or hide a column, click and hold the left or right edge of the column header and drag to the desired width. Re-sort Columns To re-sort a column in ascending order, click the column heading. To resort in descending order, click the column heading a second time.

245 Query Designer Query Menu The Query menu is accessed from the Explorer File System panel, and allows the user to maintain, clone, or delete a query. 1. On the Explorer File System panel panel, right click on the desired query. The Query pop-up menu appears. 2. Use the table to identify menu functions on the Query popup menu. Menu Item Description Change Description Opens the Description panel, allowing the user to change the query description. Clone Query Opens the Clone Query panel, allowing the user to enter the name to be assigned to the cloned query. Remove Query Open the Delete File panel, allowing the user to confirm the deletion of the query. Assign SmartPak Opens the SmartPak panel, allowing the user to maintain the SmartPak grouping value(s) associated with the query. Explore Opens Windows Explorer, allowing the user to browse to and open a query which resides outside the default query location. Global Software, Inc.

246 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Query View Panel The Query View panel is used to visually layout a query. Tables and relationships for the query are displayed in this panel. 1. In Query Designer, when a query is opened, the Query View panel appears for the selected query. Nav Tip: This panel may also be accessed from the Ribbon, by selecting Home>Query View. 2. Use the table for available functions on the Query View panel. Function Description Add a Table Right click in any open gray space away from a relationship line, the Tables panel appears allowing the user to select additional tables (see Add Tables). Move a Table Drag the table header to another spot on the screen. Re-size a Table Left click and drag on the blue box at the bottom right of the table. Create a Relationship Click on a field from one table, then drag and drop it on the appropriate field in another table (see Create Relationships). Modify a Relationship Double click on a relationship line -or- select a relationship line and right click (see Create Relationships). Select a Field Double click on a field to add it to the selected fields on the Field List panel (see Fields Used Direct from Source Table).

247 Query Designer Table Menu The Table menu is accessed from the Query View panel, and allows the user to access/process various functions associated with the selected table. 1. On the Query View panel, right click on the header section of the desired table. The Table pop-up menu appears. The options available on the Table menu vary based upon the query connection type. 2. Use the table to identify menu functions on the Table popup menu. Menu Item Description Change Database/Library For DSN, iseries and SQL Server connection queries only, opens the Select Library panel, allowing the user to select a different database/library from which to retrieve the table data. The newly selected database/library name appears in the table header section. Change Schema For Oracle connection queries only, opens the Change Schema panel allowing the user to specify a different schema for the table. Change Table Owner For SQL Server connection queries only, opens the Change Table Owner panel allowing the user to specify a different owner for the table. Refresh Field Names from Database Updates the fields listed for the table. Set Table Alias For all connection queries except SAP, opens the Table Alias panel allowing the user to enter an alias name for the table. Remove Table Removes the table and any associated relationships and selected fields from the query. Global Software, Inc.

248 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Parameters Panel The Parameters panel is used to maintain parameters for the query. Test values may be assigned to the parameters, enabling the user to test a query directly in the Query Designer prior to using it in Excel. Criteria assigned to parameters also controls drill down sub query processing and the listing of valid values in Build a Template. 1. In Query Designer, when a query is opened, the Parameters panel appears for the selected query. 2. Use the table to reference the contents on the Parameters panel. 3. Field Description ID System assigned parameter ID number. Description Parameter description, generally the field name. Test Value Default test parameter value. Sub Query Column Column name to be used for matching to drill down panel column names when determining whether the query is a valid sub query for the associated drill down (see Sub Query Column). Assign Query Query to be used for listing valid values for the parameter on the Build a Template panel (see Assign Query). Use the table to reference available functions on the Parameters panel. Function Description Add a Parameter To add a new parameter, click the Add button. The Add a Parameter popup panel appears (see Standard Parameters in the Query Designer). Edit a Parameter To modify a parameter, click in the desired field and a blinking cursor appears allowing changes. Save Changes To save a change to an existing parameter, click the Save button. Delete a Parameter To delete an existing parameter, click the Del button. Move Columns To move a column, click and hold the column header and drag to the desired location. Re-size / Hide Columns To re-size or hide a column, click and hold the left or right edge of the column header and drag to the desired width. Re-sort Columns To re-sort a column in ascending order, click the column heading. To resort in descending order, click the column heading a second time

249 Query Designer Field List Panel The Field List panel displays the fields included in the query and the field attributes that will be utilized to retrieve the data. In addition, the panel displays information as to how the data will be grouped, sorted, displayed and selected. 1. In Query Designer, when a query is opened, the Field List panel appears for the selected query. 2. Use the table to reference the contents on the Field List panel. Field Column Description Type Type of field. Valid types are T (text), N (numeric), D (date), B (Boolean) and U (unknown). Field Name Field name from the source table. In addition, an alias name may be assigned to the field. The alias name appears in front of the actual field name. Example: Field name is CNME and the alias name is Customer Name. Totals Indicates how the field is being grouped (totaled). This column only appears when the Totals function is being used (see Create a Totals Query. Table Name Source table from which the field is being retrieved. The value "(none)" appears for a calculated field. Sort Type Indicates whether or not to use the field for sorting, and how to sort the field. Valid values are (none), Ascending, and Descending. Sort Order Indicates the order by which the query data will be sorted. The field with the lowest number is the first sort key. Visible Indicates whether or not the field will be visible in the query output. By default all fields are visible. De-selecting the option for a selected field will allow the field to be used as selection criteria, but not included in the query output. Criteria 1-6 Selection criteria (i.e. specific values, parameters, expressions) to be used when retrieving query data. Criteria entered vertically in the same column are combined with a logical AND. Criteria entered horizontally across columns are combined with a logical OR. Click the ellipse button ( ) for the appropriate field to access the Builder for entering criteria expressions (see Builder Panel). Global Software, Inc.

250 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Field List Menu The Field List Menu is accessed from the Field List panel, and allows the user to access/process various functions associated with selected query fields. 1. On the Field List panel, right click on a field. The Field List popup menu appears. 2. Use the table to identify menu functions on the Field List popup menu. Menu Item Description Totals Toggles to display or hide the Group By column (see Create a Totals Query). Unique Rows When enabled changes the query to a SELECT DISTINCT query, thus removing duplicate rows from the result set causing each row to be unique. GEXQ (Summary) Field Creates summary SQL code for the selected field (see Create the GEXQ Field). Alias (... AS nnnnnn ) Allows the user to manually assign an alias name to the selected field (see Assign Aliases to Fields). Add Field Descriptions as Aliases Creates aliases for each field in the query using the field descriptions from the table schema (see Assign Aliases to Fields). Add Smart Parm for This Field Creates a smart parameter and assigns it to the selected field (see Smart Parms in the Query Designer). Add Calculated Field Opens the Builder panel that avails the user to the query source tables and parameters, and provides tools to aid in creating a calculated field (see Create/Edit Calculated Fields). Edit Calculated Field Opens the Builder panel for a selected calculated field (see Create/Edit Calculated Fields). Move Field Up/Down Moves the selected field up or down one line. An alternative to this is to drag the selected field with the mouse and drop it in the desired location. Delete Field Deletes the selected field from the query.

251 Query Designer Builder Panel The Builder is used to enter query criteria or create calculated fields. The Builder panel may be accessed from the Field List panel by: Selecting the ellipse button located in one of the seven criteria fields. Selecting a field, right clicking and selecting Add Calculated Field -or- Edit Calculated Field (see Create/Edit Calculated Fields). Builder Operation Buttons Operation buttons are provided on the Builder panel to assist the user in building expressions. Global Software, Inc.

252 244 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Builder Functional Buttons Additional functional buttons are available on the Builder panel. Button Function iseries, Oracle, SQL Server Tabs: Each tab has specific features to support the appropriate server. Not all features are available on each tab. Current Date Inserts the expression for the current date into the query. CASE Builder Open the Case Builder panel, allowing the user to create a case statement and push it into the Builder panel (see Use the CASE Builder). 90 Days Ago Inserts the (CURRENT DATE - 90 DAYS) expression. The "- 90" may then be changed to a different value. TRIM (<expr>) Trims leading and trailing blanks. In ('x','x') Inserts an IN expression (valid if field criteria is in a comma-delimited list). Date Conversion Click the down arrow and select the original format of the date field to be converted. The system then inserts the selected date field into an expression that converts the field into an actual Date Type field. YYDDD - Julian date format used by Infinium CYYDDD - Julian date format used by JD Edwards YYYYDDD - Julian date format used by Jack Henry YYYYMMDD - date format used by BPCS Note: Date formats are not exclusive to the ledgers listed above. Salesforce Tab: Refer to Salesforce documentation for more information regarding date functions and date literals. Today Inserts the date literal, which starts 12:00:00 of the current day and continues for 24 hours. Last_90_Days Inserts the date literal, which starts 12:00:00 of the current day and continues for the last 90 days. Last_N_Days:30 Inserts the date literal, which for the number n provided, starts 12:00:00 of the current day and continues for the last n days. The "30" may then be changed to a different value. Last_N_Weeks:2 Inserts the date literal, which for the number n provided, starts 12:00:00 of the last day of the previous week and continues for the last n weeks. The "2" may then be changed to a different value. Next_90_Days Inserts the date literal, which starts 12:00:00 of the current day and continues for the next 90 days. Next_N_Days:30 Inserts the date literal, for which the number n provided, starts 12:00:00 of the current day and continues for the next n days. The "30" may then be changed to a different value. This_Year Inserts the date literal, which starts 12:00:00 on January 1 of the current year and continues through the end of December 31 of the current year. Calendar_Month Inserts the date function, which returns a number representing the calendar month for the selected date field. Calendar_Quarter Inserts the date function, which returns a number representing the calendar quarter for the selected date field. Calendar_Year Inserts the date function, which returns a number representing the calendar year for the selected date field.

253 Query Designer Button 245 Function Day_In_Month Inserts the date function, which returns a number representing the day in the month for the selected date field. Day_In_Year Inserts the date function, which returns a number representing the day in the year for the selected date field. Week_In_Month Inserts the date function, which returns a number representing the week in the month for the selected date field. Week_In_Year Inserts the date function, which returns a number representing the week in the year for the selected date field. Misc Tab: %GEXDROW% Replaces the ROW number of the Excel row when used as detail results in a GEXD formula (see GEXD Row). COALESCE Converts null values to the value specified in the function (the default is 0). %USER% Replaces the username in the connection to the data. Logic Click the down arrow to access additional %IF and %LOOP functions. Simple Loop Inserts loop statement, allowing the query to loop through fields and summarize them based on user defined parameters for the loop counter. The loop will continue to process from the first counter until it hits the second counter. Loop Count Inserts the keyword %LOOPCOUNT%. Loop Count NN Inserts the keyword %LOOPCOUNT2%. The "2" may then be changed to a different number to indicate the number of characters/digits to display for the value. Simple IF Inserts a basic IF-THEN-ELSE statement which the user can then modify as necessary. %WINDOWSUSER% Replaces the Windows User ID when executing the query. Custom Buttons Performs user defined function (see Custom Buttons). Get Values Retrieves each distinct value of a selected field (see Get Values). Comments Reference the following for entering comments on the Builder panel. Comments must be on a separate line. Connection Type Comment Syntax Access Comments are not supported. DSN DSN owner should k now whether or not comments are supported. iseries /*this is a comment*/ Oracle /*this is a comment*/ SAP Comments are not supported. SQL Server Two dashes then the comment text (i.e. --this is a comment) Global Software, Inc.

254 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Custom Buttons The Builder panel contains two custom buttons. The user defines the function to occur when each button is selected. To Maintain Custom Buttons: 1. On the Builder panel Misc tab, click the Edit Custom Buttons button ( 2. Use the table to enter data on the Customize Builder panel. 3. ). The Customize Builder panel appears. Field Description Button to Customize Click the down arrow and select which custom button to modify. Display Text Specify the label to appear on the custom button. Tool Tip Specify the tool tip to appear for the custom button. Preview Displays how the custom button will appear. Assigned Function Specify the function to occur or the expression to be inserted into the Builder when the custom button is selected. Button Function Clear Button Assignment Clears the text, tool tip and assigned function values previously assigned to the custom button. Click OK. The system updates the custom button on the Builder panel.

255 Query Designer SQL Text Panel The SQL Text panel displays the SQL text to be executed for both a detail query and a GEXQ (summary query). Auto Generate Mode By selecting the Auto Generate check box (the default) the application continually updates the text to reflect changes made in the visual layout. Manual Mode If desired, SQL text may be manually entered or the auto-generated SQL text may be manually modified. For example, manual entry is required for establishing a SHELL to process an external program (see SQL SHELL Function). 1. De-select the Auto Generate check box. A popup panel appears. 2. On the popup panel, specify whether or not to copy the auto-generated SQL text. The Auto Generate label is set to red, indicating in manual mode. Yes -- leaves any previously auto-generated SQL text in the SQL text box. No -- clears all data from the SQL text box. 3. Toggling back and forth from auto-generate to manual mode, the system saves the changes for the life of the query. When the query is saved the text that is currently displayed in the SQL text box will be the executed SQL statement. Global Software, Inc.

256 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 QD Settings Query Designer (QD) Settings allow the user to define various criteria to control processing. The majority of the options define processing for all users on the PC; however, the option Show EDQ Detail is defined for each individual user. 1. In Query Designer from the Ribbon, select View>Settings. The Settings - General panel appears. 2. Use the table to enter data on the General panel, or to access other functions. Field Description Show EDQ Detail If selected, all query related fields are displayed on the Explorer File System panel. If not selected, only query name, size and modified date/ time are displayed thus reducing retrieval time. Auto-Alias Fields If selected, the field description is automatically assigned as the alias when a field is added to a query. If a field description does not exist, then the field name is assigned as the alias (see Assign Aliases to Fields). Note: This function does not apply to calculated fields. Include SAP "AS" Alias For SAP queries only, if selected the SQL statement is built such that aliases are identified as "AS alias name". This option must be selected in order to sort grouped queries. When this option is selected, special character restrictions are enforced for SAP alias names. Results Grid Render Right to Left If selected, text on the ResultsContainer panel is right justified. Enhanced Logging If selected, additional logging is recorded. For optimal processing, once an error has been resolved it is recommended to clear the log file and deselect the option (see QD View Log). Nav Tip: Use the View Log button to display, or clear the log file.

257 Query Designer Button Function View Log Opens the Log Viewer panel, where the user may see information and error log entries, copy selected log entries, or clear the log file (see QD View Log). The File Locations panel displays the location of various files utilized in Query Designer. These file locations are defined in user's SS Settings. Global Software, Inc.

258 250 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M The System Information panel displays various data related to the user's system and Query Designer. To this information to the helpdesk, click the button. The system opens a new Outlook panel with the contents of this panel in the body of the . Modify the address and/or text of the body as necessary and click the Send button. 5. Click OK. The system writes the changes and closes the panel.

259 Query Designer Connections A database connection must be created in order to process Query Designer queries (i.e. GEXQ, GEXD, GEXS or GEXI formulas or sub queries). All connections are created and maintained in the Configurator. In Query Designer connections may be viewed and/or tested. 1. In Query Designer from the Ribbon, select Connection>View. The Connections panel appears. 2. Use the table to enter data on the Connections panel. 3. Field Description Available Connections Displays a list of connections available for use in Query Designer to which the user is authorized. Note: The list excludes SQL Server connections flagged as load local connections. Host If applicable, displays the server name or IP address. Database If applicable, displays the database -or- for Oracle databases displays the SID and Port values. User Name Displays the user name to be used to test the database connection. The value may be keyed when the connection is set to Prompt for Input. Password Displays the password to be used to test the database connection. The value may be keyed when the connection is set to Prompt for Input Button Function Test Displays a message in the Results field indicating whether or not the connection was successful. To test a connection, select the connection from the list and click the Test button. A message appears in the Results field indicating whether or not the connection was successful. Global Software, Inc.

260 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Update Query Connections The Update Query Connections function is used to mass change the original connection assigned to queries to a new connection. 1. In Query Designer from the Ribbon, select Connection>Update Query Connections. The Update Query Connections panel appears. 2. Use the table to enter data on the Update Query Connections panel. 3. Field Description Original Connection From the list of connections, select the connection to be updated. The system displays the selected connection in the All Queries Using Connection section on the panel. Available Connections From the list of connections available for use in Query Designer, select the connection to be assigned to the queries associated with the original connection. The system displays the selected connection in the Will Now Use Connection section on the panel. Note: The list excludes SQL Server connections flagged as load local connections. Click OK. The system updates the appropriate queries, replacing the original connection with the new connection.

261 Query Designer Create a New Query Use the following steps to create a new query. 1. In Query Designer from the Ribbon, select the Globe button>new. The Query Name and Connection panel appears. 2. On the Query Name and Connection panel, specify a unique name and description (optional) for the query, and select which connection to use, then click OK. Based upon the setup of the connection either a Login panel or the Tables panel appears. Note: For SAP connections only, the Tables panel appears instead of the Login panel. After the user enters search criteria and click s the Search button then the appropriate Logon panel appears. 3. If necessary, on the Login panel enter the appropriate data (i.e. user ID and password), and click Login. The Tables panel appears. 4. Proceed to the next step, Add Tables. Global Software, Inc.

262 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Save the Query for the First Time It is recommended to save frequently during query creation/editing. The initial save of a query functions differently than when an existing query is saved. 1. In Designer Query from the Ribbon, select Home>Save Query. The Save As panel appears positioned to the default folder for EDQ files and the File Name is highlighted. Nav Tip: This function may also be processed by selecting the Globe button menu or Quick Access Toolbar equivalent (see Ribbon Menu). 2. On the Save As panel, if necessary navigate to a different folder location. Note: DO NOT change the file name at this time (this includes changing the case of individual characters). If the query name needs to be changed it may be done later using the clone function. 3. Click the Save button. The system saves the query file (.EDQ), and a confirmation panel appears. 4. Click OK.

263 Query Designer Add Tables New Query When creating a new query, the first task is to select the tables (files) required for the query. After logging into a database, the Tables panel appears listing tables from the database assigned to the applicable connection or specified on the previous Login panel. Note: For SAP connections only, the Tables panel does not initially list any tables. To list tables, enter search criteria (criteria for Description is case sensitive), click the Search button, and enter login data. Existing Query To add a table to an existing query, in Query Designer from the Ribbon select Home>Add Table. To Add Table(s) to a Query: 1. Use the table to enter data on the Tables panel. Field Description Library For iseries or SQL Server connections, click the down arrow and select the library from which to retrieve tables for the list and query execution. The value &Lib defaults indicating to use the database library specified on the Login panel. Data Type For Oracle connections only, click the down arrow and select the type from which to retrieve tables for the list and query execution. Valid types are Synonyms, Tables, and Views. Search For Specify a name or description in order to search for the desired table. For non-sap connections, each character typed filters the list. For SAP connections only, after criteria is keyed click the Search button. File Name / Description For SAP connections only, select the appropriate check boxes to indicate to apply the search criteria to the file name and/or description. Global Software, Inc.

264 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 To add tables to the Favorites list, from the All tab on the Tables panel, select the desired table(s) and click Add to Favorites. The selected tables turn green and are added to the Favorites tab. Note: Any subsequent time the Tables panel is displayed for the associated connection, the Favorites tab defaults reducing load time. 3. To select table(s) for a query, from the Tables panel: To select a single table -- double click the table -or- select the table and click the Add button. The table is added and the Query View panel appears. To select multiple tables -- press and hold the Ctrl key as tables are selected. Click the Add button. The tables are added and the Query View panel appears. To select multiple tables in a range -- select the first table in the range, press and hold the Shift key, and select the last table in the range. Click the Add button. The tables are added and the Query View panel appears. 4. To add another table to the query, from the Ribbon select Home>Add Table -or- right click in any open gray space on the Query View panel. The Tables panel appears. Repeat step 3 until all tables have been selected. 5. If the database environment has been changed (i.e. by the installation of a new version or maintenance fix of the ERP software that includes table additions or restructures), click the Refresh List from Database button ( refresh the view of tables. The system re-reads the database schema, refreshes the tables listed and their structures. 6. ) to If more than one table was selected for the query, then proceed to the next step, Create Relationships. If only one table was selected, proceed to the step Select or Create Query Fields.

265 Query Designer Create Relationships If more than one table is selected in query, it is necessary to create a relationship or join between the tables. To Create a Relationship Between Two Tables: 1. On the Query View panel, drag and drop a field from one table to the corresponding field in another table. The system will draw a line indicating which fields are joined. Below the left mouse was dragged from the F0411.RPAN8 field and dropped on the F0101.ABAN8 field. 2. If necessary, repeat step 1 to create additional joins which may be needed to create the appropriate one-to-one or one-to-many relationship between tables. 3. Once the relationship is properly defined, proceed to the step Select or Create Query Fields. To Modify Relationship Properties: 1. On the Query View panel, double click the line connecting the two tables -or- select the relationship line and right click. The Relationship Properties panel appears. Global Software, Inc.

266 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Use the table to enter data on the Relationship Properties panel. Field Description Left Table In special cases, use the Left Table section to modify the field in the left table to adhere to SQL rules. Example 1: To join a text field to a numeric field a SQL command must be entered to convert the numeric field to a text field (i.e CHAR(<field>)). Right Table In special cases, use the Right Table section to modify the field in the right table to adhere to SQL rules. See Example 1 above for the Left Table section. Joined Fields Specify the appropriate join type. By default an inner join relationship is selected, which includes only rows where the joined fields from both tables are the same. Additional options are available to join all records from the left table and only records in the right table where the joined fields match, or to join all records from the right table and only records in the left table where the joined fields match. Trim Both Fields If selected, the system trims (removes leading blanks) for both of the joined fields. 3. To delete the selected join relationship, click the Delete Relation button -or- to delete all relationships in the query, click the Delete All Relationships button. 4. Once all changes are made, click OK. 5. Once the relationship is properly defined, proceed to the step Select or Create Query Fields.

267 Query Designer Select or Create Query Fields Fields should be added to a query in the following general order: 1. Add fields that are to be used directly (as-is) from the source tables (see Fields Used Direct from Source Table). 2. Add table field descriptions as aliases (see Assign Aliases to Fields). 3. Add calculated fields (see Create/Edit Calculated Fields). 4. Rename any fields as desired (see Assign Aliases to Fields). Global Software, Inc.

268 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Fields Used Direct from Source Table Use the following steps to add fields to the query that are to be used directly (as-is) from selected source tables. 1. On the Query View panel, double click the desired field from a table -or- drag and drop the field to the Field List panel. In the example below fields RPAN8 and ABALPH were selected. 2. Repeat step 1 until all of the fields that are to be used "as-is" have been selected. 3. To search for a field, enter the field name or description in the Search field. Each character typed filters the search. For example, to find the Vendor Invoice Number field enter the word "invoice" in the search field. All fields containing the word "invoice" are filtered in the table. Clear the Search field to remove the filter.

269 Query Designer Assign Aliases to Fields As field names from tables may be nondescript and confusing, assigning an alias name to a field assists in clarifying what the field is. There are three ways to assign aliases to fields. When assigning aliases to fields, it is important as to when each method may be used to assign aliases to fields. Auto-Alias Fields -- If the Auto-Alias Fields option is selected in Settings, then the system automatically assigns the field description as the alias when a field is added to a query. If a field description does not exist, then the field name is assigned as the alias. This function does not apply to calculated fields. Add Field Descriptions as Aliases -- The system creates aliases for each field in the query using the field descriptions from the table schema. Generally this option is used immediately after all fields that are to be used directly (as-is) from the source tables have been added to the query. Once a calculated field has been added, this method for assigning aliases is no longer available. Alias (... AS nnnnnn ) -- Allows the user to manually assign or modify an alias field name to a selected field. Generally this option is used after any calculated fields have been added. Note: For SAP connection only, aliases may not contain special characters. To Add Field Descriptions as Aliases: 1. On the Field List panel, right click on a field. The Field List popup menu appears. 2. On the Field List popup menu, select Add Field Descriptions as Aliases. The system uses the field descriptions from the table schema to assign aliases to each field in the query. Note: This function replaces any aliases assigned via the Alias (... AS nnnnn) function. This function is not available after a calculated field has been added to the query. Global Software, Inc.

270 262 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 To Manually Assign or Modify a Single Alias -- Alias (... AS nnnnnn ): 1. On the Field List panel, right click on the desired field. The Field List popup menu appears (see above). 2. On the Field List popup menu, select Aliases (...AS nnnnnn). The Modify Alias panel appears. 3. On the Modify Alias panel, enter the desired alias value and click OK. The system assigns the alias field name to the selected field. Example: BEFORE aliases have been assigned (and before calculated fields have been added). AFTER Add Field Descriptions as Aliases has been processed. AFTER Alias (... AS nnnnnn ) has been processed for RPAN8, ABALPH and RPDOC. Note: When using an Access connection aliases are delimited by brack ets instead of double quotes.

271 Query Designer Create/Edit Calculated Fields A calculated field is a field that is created instead of pulled directly from a source table. Use the following steps to begin the process to create a new calculated field or to modify an existing calculated field. Note: For SAP connections only, calculated fields are limited to basic arithmetic functions add (+), subtract (-), multiply (*) and divide (/), and signs must be bounded by spaces (i.e. X + Y, not X+Y). To Create a New Calculated Field: 1. On the Field List panel, right click on a field. The Field List popup menu appears. 2. On the Field List popup menu, select Add Calculated Field. The Builder panel appears. 3. All calculated fields are defined in this panel (see Select Fields from a Table, Create Date Fields, Use the CASE Builder, GEXD Row, and Get Values). To Edit an Existing Calculated Field: 1. On the Field List panel, right click on the calculated field that requires editing. The Field List popup menu appears. 2. On the Field List popup menu, select Edit Calculated Field. The Builder panel appears. 3. On the Builder panel, make any necessary changes and click OK. 4. Additional changes may be made to a calculated field on the Field List panel, such as changing the field type or assigning an alias field name (see Field List Panel and Assign Aliases to Fields). Global Software, Inc.

272 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Select Fields from a Table Often files do not store data in the form which is desired, but various fields in the file may be combined (i.e. added or subtracted) to obtain the desired result. The Builder may be used to create an expression using fields directly from source tables to obtain the desired value. Example - Calculate the Amount Paid for an Invoice: Calculate the amount paid by subtracting the open invoice amount (RPAAP) from the gross invoice amount (RPAG). 1. On the Builder panel in the Source section, click the arrow ( ) to the left of Tables. The system expands the list of selected source tables. 2. From the expanded table list, select the source table which contains the field to be used in the expression (F0411 in this example). The system populates the Field Listing panel based upon the selected table. 3. From the Field Listings panel, double click the desired field (RPAG in this example). The selected value <lib.file.field> appears in the work area on the Builder panel. 4. In the work area, enter any math symbols by typing them -or- by clicking the appropriate operation button (if available) (a minus sign in this example). 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 as necessary until the expression is complete (RPAAP was selected in this example). 6. Click OK. The Field List panel appears, displaying the calculated field, with an alias of "Expr1", at the bottom of the list.

273 Query Designer To modify the alias field name for the calculated field, on the Field List panel right click on the field and select Alias (AS nnnnnn) from the Field List popup menu. On the Modify Alias panel, enter the desired alias for the field and click OK. Global Software, Inc.

274 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Create Date Fields Occasionally date fields in the source tables are not in a true date format as recognized by Excel. When this occurs it may be necessary to convert the field value to a date format. Below are samples of date fields in other formats (C = century, YY = year, MM = month, DD = day): YYDDD - Julian date format used by Infinium CYYDDD - Julian date format used by JDE YYYYDDD - Julian date format used by Jack Henry YYMMDD - date format used by BPCS Note: Date formats are not exclusive to the ledgers listed above. Query Designer provides a Date Conversion option on the Builder panel to convert these formats into true date formats. Example - Converting a JDE Julian Date to a True Date Calculated Field: Convert the AP invoice date field (RPDIVJ), a Julian date field in JDE, to a true date calculated field. In this scenario, the host system is an iseries (AS/400). 1. On the Builder panel in the Source section, click the arrow ( ) to the left of Tables. The system expands the list of selected source tables. 2. From the expanded table list, select the source table which contains the field to be used in the expression (F0411 in this example). The system populates the Field Listing panel based upon the selected table. 3. From the Field Listings panel, select (do not double click ) the desired field (RPDIVJ in this example). 4. On the iseries tab, click the down arrow for the Date Conversion field and select the value CYYDDD. The conversion expression appears in the work area on the Builder panel.

275 Query Designer Click OK. The Field List panel appears, displaying the calculated field, with an alias of "Expr1", at the bottom of the list. 6. To modify the alias field name for the calculated field, on the Field List panel right click on the field and select Alias (AS nnnnnn) from the Field List popup menu. On the Modify Alias panel, enter the desired alias for the field (Invoice Date in this example) and click OK. 7. Sample query results. Note: OLEDB iseries connections display dates in the format YYYY-MM-DD, where as ODBC connections display dates as MM/DD/YYYY. Global Software, Inc.

276 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Use the CASE Builder The Builder provides a tool to aid in constructing CASE statements. CASE statements may be used as calculated fields or as selection criteria. Note: For SAP connections only, CASE statements are not applicable. Example - Build a CASE Statement: Look for null (or zero) AP invoice dates (RPDIVJ) and replace them with a predefined date to prevent errors, and then convert the remaining dates, to a true date calculated field. 1. On the Builder panel iseries tab, click the CASE Builder button. The Case Builder panel appears. 2. In the WHEN field, enter the desired value -or- click the Builder button adjacent to the WHEN field to select a field from a table (the Builder button is being used in this example).

277 Query Designer In this example a single field is being selected from a source table (see Select Fields from a Table). On the Builder panel: Click the arrow ( ) to the left of Tables. Select the desired source table (F0411 in this example). Select (double click ) the desired field (RPDIVJ in this example). The selected value <lib.file.field> appears in the work area on the Builder panel. 4. Click OK on the Builder panel. The expression (&lib.f0411.rpdivj in this example) is pushed to WHEN field on the CASE Builder panel. 5. On the CASE Builder panel, use the drop down list to select the appropriate expression operator (equal (=) in this example). A new field appears to the right of the Expression Operator field. 6. In the new field, enter the desired value -or- click the Builder button adjacent to the new field to select a field from a Global Software, Inc.

278 270 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 table (zero (0) has been keyed in this example). 7. In the THEN field, enter the desired value -or- click the Builder button adjacent to the THEN field to select a field from a table (DATE('01/01/1900') has been keyed in this example). 8. Click the ADD Expression button. This starts the CASE statement in the CASE Builder work area. 9. If additional WHEN expressions are required, then edit the WHEN and THEN fields as necessary. When the revised expression is complete, click the ADD Expression button again. The revised expression is added to the current CASE statement in the work area. Repeat this process for as many fields as necessary for the CASE statement. 10. In the ELSE field, enter the desired value -or- click the Builder button adjacent to the ELSE field to select a field from a table (the Builder button is being used in this example). 11. In this example a Julian date is being selected and converted to a true date field (see Create Date Fields). On the Builder panel: Click the arrow ( ) to the left of Tables. Select the desired source table (F0411 in this example). Select (do not double click ) the desired field (RPDIVJ in this example). On the iseries tab, click the down arrow for the Date Conversion field and select the value CCYYDDD. The conversion expression appears in the work area on the Builder panel.

279 Query Designer Click OK on the Builder panel. The expression is pushed to the ELSE field on the CASE Builder panel. 13. Click the ADD Else button. The else expression is added to the current CASE statement in the work area. Global Software, Inc.

280 272 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M Click the Done button. The completed CASE statement appears the original Builder work area. 15. Click OK. The Field List panel appears, displaying the calculated field, with an alias of "Expr1", at the bottom of the list. 16. To modify the alias field name for the calculated field, on the Field List panel right click on the field and select Alias (AS nnnnnn) from the Field List popup menu. On the Modify Alias panel, enter the desired alias for the field and click OK.

281 Query Designer GEXD Row The Builder functional button, %GEXDROW%, is used to return the Excel row number for each row of data when the GEXD is generated in Excel. This function may be used to create a calculated field, and may remove the need of using fill down columns in Excel. Note: Prior to Spreadsheet Server V14R1M1, the expression %EXDROW% was used instead of %GEXDROW%. The system continues to support the legacy %EXDROW% expression. Example - Using GEXD Row Function to Create a Calculated Field: Use the GEXD Row function to create a calculated field which will calculate/report the amount paid by subtracting the open invoice amount column from the gross invoice amount column in Excel. Initial Set Up: 1. Create a new query, retrieving gross invoice amount and open invoice amount (see below). To Add a Calculated Field using the GEXD Row Function: 1. On the Field List panel, right click on a field and Select Add a Calculated Field on the Field List popup menu. The Builder panel appears. 2. In the work area on the Builder panel, enter the appropriate to build the expression. In this example the following has been entered: Type ' (a single quote). From the operation buttons, click = (Equal). Type D (capital letter D). From the Misc tab, click %GEXDROW%. From the operation buttons, click - (Minus). Type E (capital letter E) From the Misc tab, click %GEXDROW%. Type ' (a single quote). 3. Click OK. The Field List panel appears, displaying the calculated field, with an alias of "Expr1", at the bottom of the list. Global Software, Inc.

282 274 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M To modify the alias field name for the calculated field, on the Field List panel right click on the field and select Alias (AS nnnnnn) from the Field List popup menu. On the Modify Alias panel, enter the desired alias for the field (Amount Paid) and click OK. 5. From the Ribbon, select Home>Save Query. 6. From the Ribbon, select Home>Single Record to execute the query. The ResultsContainer panel appears displaying one record. 7. In Excel, create a GEXD formula with the following values (see Create and Use GEXD formulas). Select the query name identified in step 5. Specify the target worksheet. Type the Starting Cell/Range/Table. Select to Include Headings. Specify the cell reference for the Smart Parm. 8. Select the cell containing the GEXD formula, then right click and select Spreadsheet Server>Generate This Detail Report (GEXD) -or- select the ribbon equivalent (see SS Ribbon). The %GEXDROW% creates a calculation, subtracting column E from column D, for all rows included in the generated data output. This functions similar to the GEXD fill down columns feature.

283 Query Designer Get Values The Builder provides a Get Values button to display a list of the existing field values for a selected field. From the list, values may be selected and used as arguments/criteria in a variety of Builder functions. Example - Using Get Values in an IN( ) Statement: Add selection criteria to only retrieve records where Line Number (RPLNID) equals 10000, or On Field List panel for the desired field (RPLNID in this example), click the ellipse button located in one of the seven criteria fields. The Builder panel appears. 2. On the Builder panel in the Source section, click the arrow ( ) to the left of Tables. The system expands the list of selected source tables. 3. From the expanded table list, select the source table which contains the field to be used in the expression (F0411 in this example). The system populates the Field Listing panel based upon the selected table. 4. From the Field Listings panel, select (do not double click ) the desired field (RPLNID in this example). 5. Click the Get Values button. The system displays a list of existing field values for the selected field. Note: Increase or decrease the font size of listed values by click ing the Global Software, Inc. or buttons.

284 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Select the desired field value(s): To select a single value -- select the value. To select multiple values -- press and hold the Ctrl key as values are selected on the list. To select values in a range -- select the first value in the range, press and hold the Shift key, and select the last value in the range. Note: Double click ing a value in the list pushes the value directly to the Builder expression work area. Single click the value when an additional function is to be applied to the value before pushing it into the work area. 7. Select the desired function button. In this example the selected values (10000, and 13000) are being inserted into an IN( ) statement, so the IN ('x','x') button is clicked. The IN statement using the selected values appears in the work area on the Builder panel. Note: The IN ('x','x') button causes all arguments to be entered as text values (in single quotes). If the field is numeric, then manually remove the quote mark s. 8. When the expression is complete, click OK.

285 Query Designer 9.9 Add Criteria Hard Coded Criteria 277 Field selection criteria may be hard coded. These hard coded values may not be altered at query run time (i.e. in Excel). Hard coded criteria may be entered directly on the Field List panel or via the Builder panel. Example of hard coded criteria would be "Open Amount <> 0" or "Status = Active". To Enter Hard Coded Criteria via the Field List Panel: 1. On the Field List panel, click within one of the seven Criteria fields for the desired field and manually key the selection criteria (<>) in this example). To Enter Hard Coded Criteria via the Builder Panel: 1. On the Field List panel, click the ellipse button -or- double click within one of the seven Criteria fields for the desired field. The Builder panel appears. 2. On the Builder panel, selection criteria may be keyed directly in the work area or by using the appropriate operation or functional buttons to develop the expression. 3. When the expression is complete, click OK. Global Software, Inc.

286 278 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M Create and Use Parameters Parameters in Query Designer vs Excel Parameters are added to a query as a place-holder for when selection criteria is to be specified in Excel. A default parameter value may be defined in the query for testing purposes, and then the actual criteria is specified in Excel at the time the formula is executed. Query Designer When a query is created or modified, it is normal to execute the query in Query Designer to test the results. When testing a query parameter values are specified in the Parameters panel (see Parameters Panel). Excel Query Designer queries are executed from Excel via formulas (GEXQ, GEXD, GEXS, GEXI). Each of these formulas have arguments where parameter values may be specified. These values may be hard-coded in the formula definition; however, it is recommended to use cell references.

287 Query Designer Standard Parameters in the Query Designer Standard Parameters allow the user full control over how the system interprets a parameter. When using standard parameters the query writer must know various SQL rules for working with text fields, numeric values, lists and ranges of values. Note: Standard Parameters differ from Smart Parms. Smart Parms simplify query writing by using standard rules for processing parameters (see Smart Parms Criteria Entry Rules and Smart Parms in the Query Designer). To Create a Parameter: 1. On the Parameters panel, click the Add button. The Add a Parameter panel appears Use the table to enter data on the Add a Parameter panel. Field Description Parameter Description Specify a description for the parameter. Test Value Specify the default value to be used for the parameter. Sub Query Column If required, click the ellipse button ( ) to access the Select Sub Query Column panel for selecting the column name to be used for matching to drill down panel column names when determining whether the query is a valid sub query for the associated drill down (see Sub Query Column). Assign Query If required, click the down arrow and select the query to be used for listing valid values for the parameter on the Build a Template panel (see Assign Query. Click Save. The new parameter appears on the Parameters panel. Global Software, Inc.

288 280 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 To Insert a Parameter into a Criteria Field: 1. On the Field List panel, click the ellipse button -or- double click within one of the seven Criteria fields for the desired field. The Builder panel appears. 2. On the Builder panel in the Source section, click the arrow ( ) to the left of Parameters. The system expands the list of available parameters. 3. From the expanded parameter list, select the parameter to be used. 4. Double click <value as (number or string)>. The parameter, &PARM01, appears in the work area on the Builder panel. 5. Enter any comparison operators and other characters as necessary to complete the criteria expression (i.e. =&PARM01). 6. Click OK. The Field List panel appears with the parameter inserted in the selected criteria field.

289 Query Designer Smart Parms Criteria Entry Rules When using standard parameters the query writer must know various SQL rules for working with text fields, numeric values, lists and ranges of values. Smart Parms simplify query writing by using standard rules for processing parameters. The rules used by Smart Parms are similar to those used in Global's Spreadsheet Server products for specifying segment values. Below is a comparison by example of SQL (iseries DB2) rules for specifying criteria values used by standard parameters versus Smart Parms. Criteria Type Standard Parameters Smart Parms Single Value - Text ='ABC' ABC Single Value - Numeric = Single Value - Date =DATE('01/01/2007') 1/1/2007 Mask (wildcard) LIKE 'A%' A* Mask (wildcard) for All Values LIKE '%' * or a blank Mask (wildcard) for a Single Value LIKE '_500' *500 Range - Text BETWEEN 'ABC' AND 'DEF' ABC.DEF Range - Numeric BETWEEN 123 AND Range - Date BETWEEN DATE('01/01/2007') AND DATE('03/31/2007') 1/1/2007.3/31/2007 Value List - Text IN('A','B','C') [A,B,C] Value List - Numeric IN(1,2,3) [1,2,3] Value List with Exclude N/A [AAA.CCC,/BBB] Note: May not exclude a segment list Field is Blank N/A BLANK Field is Not Blank N/A NOTBLANK Greater Than or Equal To >= Less Than or Equal To <= Logical NOT (using alphabet as dataset) NOT IN('A','B','C') [D.Z] Segment List (see Create/Maintain Segment Lists) N/A Field (see Note) Note: Alias as defined in the Configurator Note: Field allows for using different fields in the file as criteria for retrieving data without having to change the query. With Smart Parms no comparison operators are used (=,<>,<,>,BETWEEN, LIKE, NOT). The Smart Parm routine actually converts the expression to one that uses SQL rules. Global Software, Inc.

290 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Smart Parms in the Query Designer Smart Parms may be added to a field directly on the Field List panel or via the Builder panel. Note: Prior to adding a Smart Parm to a field an alias name must be assigned to the field (see Assign Aliases to Fields). To Add Smart Parms via the Field List Panel: 1. On the Field List panel, right click on the desired field. The Field List popup menu appears. 2. On the Field List popup menu, select Add Smart Parm for This Field. A parameter for the field is added to the Parameter panel with a blank value, and the Smart Parm (&SPARM01) is inserted into the Criteria 1 field. To Add Smart Parms via the Builder Panel: Note: This method must be used to add Smart Parms in other Criteria fields besides Criteria If the parameter doesn't already exist, create it (see Standard Parameters in the Query Designer). 2. On the Field List panel, click the ellipse button -or- double click within one of the seven Criteria fields for the desired field. The Builder panel appears. 3. On the Builder panel in the Source section, click the arrow ( ) to the left of Parameters. The system expands the list of available parameters. 4. From the expanded parameter list, select the parameter to be used. 5. Double click <value as smart parm>. The Smart Parm appears in the work area on the Builder panel. No other supporting characters (i.e. =, <, >) are required. 6. Click OK. The Field List panel appears with the Smart Parm inserted in the selected criteria field.

291 Query Designer 283 To Delete Smart Parms: Note: If multiple Smart Parms exist for a query, only the last (highest number) Smart Parm in the list may be deleted. Example: Have Smart Parms 1, 2 and 3. Smart Parm 3 may be deleted; however, Smart Parm 2 may not be deleted unless Smart Parm 3 is first deleted. 1. In the Parameters panel, select the highest number Smart Parm and click Del. The system displays a confirmation panel. Click OK. The system removes the Smart Parm from the Parameters panel. 2. On the Field List panel, click the associated Smart Parm criteria field value. The Builder panel appears. Delete the Smart Parm field value. Click OK. The system removes the criteria field value from the Field List. 3. Repeat the steps above to delete additional Smart Parms. Global Software, Inc.

292 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Parameters in Excel Parameters are used in Excel in conjunction with query formulas to provide criteria for the query being executed. To Use Parameters in Excel: 1. Prior to using a new or modified query, in Excel from the SServer menu, select Refresh Queries -or- select the ribbon equivalent (see SS Ribbon). The system refreshes query data. 2. Layout the Excel report and assign cell references for each parameter. 3. Position the cell pointer to where the Query Designer formula is to go. 4. Open the Formula Assistant, assign values to the arguments, including the cell positions of the parameters. 5. Click the Insert button to save the formula into the cell. 6. To change the query criteria value, enter the new value in the cell designated and re-run the query.

293 Query Designer Sub Query Column On drill down panels in Query Designer and Spreadsheet Server, a Sub Queries option exists allowing the user to drill down from the current drill down panel to a user-defined query. The Sub Queries submenu contains a list of all the EDQ files that have column names in the Sub Query Column parameter field matching column names on the original drill down panel. Note: All Sub Query Columns defined in the detail query must be present on the original drill down panel for query to be available on the Sub Queries menu. To Create Sub Query: 1. Create the related detail query(ies) (AR Customer Master Data.edq and AR Customer Sales Summary.edq in this example) to be associated with the GXL balance or journals drill down, or initial query (AR Sales Summary.edq in this example). 2. For each related detail query on the Parameters panel, click the ellipse button in the Sub Query Column for the appropriate parameter. The Select Sub Query Column panel appears. 3. Select the folder or subdirectory for which to list queries (EDQ files). The system lists the appropriate queries. 4. Select the query for which to list available column names. The system adds the column names from the selected query to the list of available standard column names. Standard columns, %SS_KEY1%, %SS_KEY2%, %SS_KEY3%, %SS_YEAR%, %SS_FORMAT%, % SS_PERIOD%, %SS_FROMPERIOD%, and %SS_TOPERIOD%, are used for data passed to a sub query when executed from a GXL balance or journals drill down. The values for these columns are the values from the original GXL formula, thus mak ing is possible to design an EDQ as the journals sub query drill down. Standard columns, %SPARM01% through %SPARM15%, are used for data passed to a sub query when executed from a query (i.e. GEXQ, GEXD) drill down. The values for these columns are the values from the original formula s parameters. 5. Manually enter -or- double click the column name to be referenced. The selected column name is inserted into the Sub Query Column to Insert field. Global Software, Inc.

294 286 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M Click Insert. The selected Sub Query Column to Insert value is inserted into the Sub Query Column field on the Parameters panel. 7. Later when drilling down on the GXL balance or journals drill down, or initial query, select the desired row, right click and then from the Sub Query sub menu select the appropriate detail query for which to view results. The system displays the data for the selected detail query.

295 Query Designer Assign Query A query may be created for listing valid values for another query parameter on the Build a Template panel in Excel. 1. Create a reporting query (ex. Northwind Orders.edq) and a "lookup" query (ex. Northwind Country Lookup.edq). 2. In the reporting query on the Parameters panel, click the Assign Query down arrow for the appropriate parameter and select the desired "lookup" query. Save the parameter, and save query changes. 3. In Excel on the Build a Template panel when the reporting query is selected, an ellipse button appears for the parameter (ex. Country). Click the ellipse button to execute the "lookup" query. Global Software, Inc.

296 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 GEXD Limit Query Designer allows the user to assign the number of records to be returned in Excel when a GEXD formula is generated. In addition, the GEXD limit may also be assigned as a query parameter, allowing the user the ability to modify the desired number of records as necessary. To Assign a GEXD Limit: 1. From the Ribbon select Home, and then in the GEXD Limit field specify the maximum number of records to be output in Excel for the query. Value of "0" indicates no limit to GEXD records returned in Excel. Positive integer indicates the number of records to be returned by the GEXD formula in Excel. To Assign GEXD Limit as a Parameter: 1. On the Parameters panel, click the Add button. The Add a Parameter panel appears. 2. On the Add a Parameter panel, enter a description (i.e. GEXDLimit) and a default value for the number of records to be returned when processing the GEXD, and then click Save. The new parameter is added to the Parameters panel. 3. From the Ribbon select Home, and then in the GEXD Limit field enter '&SPARMxx' (where xx equals the ID number assigned to the GEXD limit parameter created in the previous step), and then click Save. 4. When the query is used in Excel, the parameter created above appears allowing the user to specify the desired number of records to be returned when the query is generated.

297 Query Designer Create a Totals Query When a query is created, by default it is a detail query -- one in which each record is displayed in the output. The query may be modified to become a totals (or group by) query, such that only summarized records are displayed. To Create a Totals Query: 1. On the Field List panel, right click on a field and select Totals on the Field List popup menu. The Totals column appears in on the Field List panel displaying the value "Group By" for each field except calculated fields (which have no default). 2. For each field in the list, click the down arrow and select the proper Totals value (see table below) based upon the planned output for the query. Totals Value Description Group By Displays each distinct value once per break point. Sum Sums the field for each record at the break point. Avg Averages the field at each break point. Min Displays the minimum value for the field at each break point. Max Displays the maximum value for the field at each break point. Count Counts the records for the field at each break point. StDev Displays the standard deviation for the field at each break point. Var Displays the variance for the field at each break point. First Displays the first value for the field. Last Displays the last value for the field. Expression Does not assign a Group By value, but is used for calculated fields where the Group By value has already been assigned in the definition of the field. Where For "Visible" fields, use when criteria will be applied to the grouped field. This is expressed in the SQL code as a HAVING statement. For fields that are not "Visible", use when criteria will be applied at a detail record level. This is expressed in the SQL code as a WHERE statement. Global Software, Inc.

298 290 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Contrast of Detail Output to Totaled Output: Example 1 - Detail Output (each output record visible): Example 2 - Totaled Output (one output record per vendor):

299 Query Designer Create the GEXQ Field A GEXQ (summary) field is used to summarize (i.e. total, count, average) a selected numeric field. In Excel a GEXQ formula is then used to return a single value from the GEXQ (summary) portion of a query into a spreadsheet. A user may then drill down upon the summary value to see detailed results (see GEXQ Formulas). To Designate a Field as an GEXQ Summary Field: 1. On the Field List panel, right click on the desired field. The Field List popup menu appears. 2. On the Field List popup menu, select GEXQ (Summary) Field. The Summary Type panel appears. 3. On the Summary Type panel, select the desired summary type. Note: If a field is an expression that already contains a summary type (e.g. SUM(RPAAP)), then select the Summary Type as Embedded to avoid syntax lik e Sum(Sum(...)). 4. Click the Save button. The resulting field will be designated with a 5. Defining a field as the GEXQ summary field also creates SQL code that is executed when the GEXQ is run from Excel. This code is displayed on the SQL Text panel on the GEXQ tab. Global Software, Inc. symbol in the Field List panel.

300 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 SQL SHELL Function The SHELL function creates a dynamic cross application functionality with Query Designer. Using the text SHELL within the SQL Text panel followed by an external program or file name, adds versatility to the SQL statement by launching the external program and/or opening the file or image providing access to additional data. This function allows the user to process anything which could be processed in the RUN command in Windows. The SHELL statement may be used as part of a query detail drill down. Example - SHELL Statement Used to Access a Vendor Voucher in a Word Document: In this example, the query has two parameters, Vendor # and Voucher #, and the Amount Gross field is an GEXQ summary field. 1. In the SQL Text panel, change to manual entry mode (see SQL Text Panel): De-select the Auto Generate check box. Click No to not copy the auto-generated SQL text. 2. Within the SQL Text panel, key the text SHELL, press Enter, and key the additional text required to run the command or launch the external program. In this example C:\PO\&PARM02.docx has been keyed, indicating: C:\PO\ -- The network directory location of the target file. &PARM02 -- The Voucher # parameter defined in Query Designer and used in Excel cell reference..docx -- The file extension of the target file. 3. From the Ribbon, select Home>Save Query. 4. In Excel, add the GEXQ formula. Use cell references for the parameters (see GEXQ Formulas). 5. To execute the SHELL statement, select the cell containing the GEXQ formula, then right click and select Spreadsheet Server>Drill Down -or- select the menu, toolbar or ribbon equivalent (see SServer Menu, SS Toolbar or SS Ribbon). The SHELL statement is executed (opens the Microsoft Word document C:\PO\12324.docx in this example).

301 Query Designer Execute Query Once all fields have been selected and added to the Field List panel, it is suggested to run a quick test to verify the query setup. To Execute a Query: 1. In Query Designer from the Ribbon, select Home>Single Record -or- Home>1,000 Records. The ResultsContainer panel appears displaying query results for either a single record or the first 1,000 records in the file based upon the option selected. Note: A similar panel is also displayed when a drill down is performed on a GEXQ or GEXI formula in Excel (see GEXQ Formula or GEXI Formula). Click the link to go to a related topic: General Grid Features or Copy/Export Records. Global Software, Inc.

302 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Legacy Ad Hoc Queries Prior to Spreadsheet Server V14R1M1, users had the ability to create ad hoc queries in Query Designer which enabled the user to drill down from the results view of a query to detail data associated with another query. As of V14R1M1, this feature is being replaced with the sub query processing (see Sub Query Column). The Legacy Ad Hoc Queries function displays preexisting ad hoc queries, allowing the user to determine which current queries need to be modified (assigned Sub Query Column criteria). Contact Global for assistance in updating existing queries to utilize sub query processing. To Access Legacy Ad Hoc Queries: 1. Close all queries. 2. From the Ribbon, select View>Legacy Ad Hoc Queries. The Legacy Ad Hoc Queries panel appears.

303 Query Designer Query Management Once a query has been created, various functions are available to maintain, clone, delete or lock/unlock a query. To Modify a Query Description: 1. From the list of EDQ files select the desired query, right click and select Change Description. The Description panel appears. 2. On the Description panel, key the desired description. 3. Click OK. To Clone a Query: 1. From the list of EDQ files select the desired query, right click and select Clone Query -or- select Clone from the File System tab on the ribbon (see Ribbon Menu). The Clone Query panel appears. 2. On the Clone Query panel, enter a query name for the clone. 3. Click OK. The new query appears in the list of available queries. To Delete a Query: 1. From the list of EDQ files select the desired query, right click and select Clone Query -or- select Delete from the File System tab on the ribbon (see Ribbon Menu). The Delete File panel appears. 2. Click Yes. The query is removed from the list of available queries. To Lock a Query: Open the desired query. From the Ribbon select Home>Un-Locked. The Lock Query panel appears. Click Yes. The Password Protection panel appears. On the Password Protection panel, enter the password to be used to protect the query. Click OK. A confirmation panel appears, confirming that the query is locked. To Unlock a Query: Open the desired query. From the Ribbon select Home>Locked. The Unlock panel appears. Click Yes. The Password Protection panel appears. On the Password Protection panel, enter the password previously assigned to lock the query. Click OK. A confirmation panel appears, confirming that the lock has been removed for the query. Global Software, Inc.

304 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Download or Publish Query Exchange Queries Query Exchange is an online depository of queries. Query Designer allows the user to access the online query depository, download selected queries to the Query Designer and then utilize them in Excel. In addition, a Query Designer user may publish an existing query to Query Exchange. A user's ability to access Query Exchange is determined by a user setting in the Configurator. Note: Must be connected to the internet to have access to the Query Exchange component. To Download a Query from Query Exchange: 1. From within Query Designer: In Query Designer from the Ribbon, select Home>Search Online. Query Exchange opens. From within Excel: In Excel, access either the Build a Template or Formula Assistant panel and select the appropriate GEXQ, GEXD, GEXS or GEXI formula or tab. Click the Search Online button ( 2. ). Query Exchange opens. Continue with step 2 in the Download Queries from Query Exchange section. To Publish a Query to Query Exchange: 1. In Query Designer, open the desired query to be published. 2. From the Ribbon, select Home>Publish. The query is published to Query Exchange. Global reviews all published queries prior to promoting them to Query Exchange. Note: If a description does not exist for the selected query, a prompt panel appears requiring the user to enter a query description.

305 Query Designer Textual Query Definition Use the Textual Query Definition function is as a convenient way to document queries. 1. Open the query. 2. From the Ribbon, select Home>Definition. Windows Notepad opens displaying the query definition. Sample Textual Query Definition: Query Name: AP Open Invoices Query File Name: P:\E-Dash\GSI Queries\AP Open Invoices.edq Tables/Files in query: Table: F0411 Table: F0101 Relationships: Inner Join (ACCOUNTS PAYABLE LEDGER) (ADDRESS BOOK MASTER) F0411. RPAN8 = F0101. ABAN8 Selected Fields: F0411 F0101 F0411 F0411 F RPAN8 ABALPH RPDOC RPAG RPAAP Alias: Alias: Alias: Alias: Alias: "Vendor #" Sort= "Vendor Name" "Voucher #" "AmountGross" "AmountOpen" Ascending Visible=True Sort= (none) Visible=True Sort= (none) Visible=True Sort= (none) Visible=True Sort= (none) Visible=True Calculated Field: "AmountRemaining" &lib.f0411.rpag/100 - &lib.f0411.rpaap/100 Alias: "AmountRemaining" Visible=True Sort= none) Calculated Field: "Invoice Date" CASE WHEN &lib.f0411.rpdivj = 0 THEN DATE('01/01/1900') ELSE DATE(DIGITS( DECIMAL( &lib.f0411.rpdivj ,7,0)) ) END Alias: "Invoice Date" F0411. RPDIVJ Parameters PARM01 Alias: "Invoice Date Julian" Description Value Vendor # 459 Criteria: F0411. RPAN8 F0411. RPAAP F0411. RPDIVJ Global Software, Inc. Sort= (none) &SPARM01 <>0 <>0 Visible=True Sort= (none) Visible=False

306 298 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Summarize (GEXQ): RPAAP Detail SQL (AUTO): SELECT &lib.f0411.rpan8 AS "Vendor #", &lib.f0101.abalph AS "Vendor Name", &lib.f0411.rpdoc AS "Voucher #", &lib.f0411.rpag/100 AS "AmountGross", &lib.f0411.rpaap/100 AS "AmountOpen", &lib.f0411.rpag/100 - &lib.f0411.rpaap/100 "AmountRemaining", CASE WHEN &lib.f0411.rpdivj = 0 THEN DATE('01/01/1900') ELSE DATE(DIGITS( DECIMAL( &lib.f0411.rpdivj ,7,0)) ) END AS "Invoice Date" FROM ((&lib.f0411 INNER JOIN &lib.f0101 ON WHERE (((&lib.f0411.rpan8) &SPARM01 ) AND ((&lib.f0411.rpdivj)<>0) ) ORDER BY "Vendor #" GEXQ SQL (AUTO): SELECT SUM(&lib.F0411.RPAAP/100) as GEXQ FROM ((&lib.f0411 INNER JOIN &lib.f0101 ON WHERE (((&lib.f0411.rpan8) &SPARM01 ) AND ((&lib.f0411.rpdivj)<>0) ) (&lib.f0411.rpan8=&lib.f0101.aban8))) ((&lib.f0411.rpaap/100)<>0) AND (&lib.f0411.rpan8=&lib.f0101.aban8))) ((&lib.f0411.rpaap/100)<>0) AND AS

307 Query Designer QD View Log During all processing, various logging information is recorded. If the QD Settings option Enhanced Logging is selected, then the system records additional error message logging data. Log entries may be viewed, copied or ed. 1. In Query Designer from the Ribbon, select View>View Log File. The Log Viewer panel appears displaying the level, date, time and description for each log entry. In addition, in the bottom right hand corner the panel displays a count of the number of entries listed. Nav Tip: This panel may also be accessed by selecting the View Log button on the QD Settings panel (see QD Settings). 2. See SS View Log for additional information regarding the View Log function. Global Software, Inc.

308 300 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M Distribution Manager 10.1 DM Navigation Distribution Manager uses the following navigation methods for processing functions within Excel. Each function is not always available from each method. DistMgr Menu (see DistMgr Menu) Distribution Manager Toolbar (see DM Toolbar) Spreadsheet Server Ribbon (see SS Ribbon) NAVIGATION TIPS: Throughout the manual navigation tips, noted by the convention "NAV TIP", will be listed indicating the various paths available to access a function.

309 Distribution Manager DistMgr Menu After Spreadsheet Server is installed and initiated as an add-in to Excel, the DistMgr menu is added to Excel. The DistMgr menu is used to access/process various functions in the application. Note: For Excel 2003, the DistMgr menu is accessible from the Excel menu bar. For Excel 2007 (and above), the DistMgr menu is accessible from the Add-Ins ribbon. Menu Item Description About Distribution Manager Opens the Distribution Manager Settings - About panel, displaying company and product information, and allowing the user access to online manuals. Settings Opens the Distribution Manager Settings - General panel, allowing the user to define various criteria to control processing and to access the Log Viewer panel, where the user may see information and error log entries, copy selected log entries, or clear the log file (see DM Settings and DM View Log). Create New Distribution Control Worksheet Creates a new distribution control worksheet (see Create a Distribution Control Worksheet). Distribute All Distributes all specifications within the workbook (see Distribute Specifications). Global Software, Inc.

310 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 DM Toolbar After Spreadsheet Server is installed and initiated as an add-in to Excel, a Distribution Manager (DM) toolbar is added to Excel. The DM toolbar may be used as a convenient alternative to access/process various functions in the application. Note: For Excel 2003, the DM toolbar is accessible in the standard toolbar section. For Excel 2007 (and above), the DM toolbar is accessible from the Add-Ins ribbon. Menu Item Distribute All DM Settings Maintain DM Specs Description Distributes all specifications within the workbook (see Distribute Specifications). Opens the Distribution Manager Settings - General panel, allowing the user to define various criteria to control processing and to access the Log Viewer panel, where the user may see information and error log entries, copy selected log entries, or clear the log file (see DM Settings and DM View Log). Opens the Maintain Specifications panel, allowing the user to create and/or maintain distribution criteria (see Add Specification Rows and Maintain Specification Rows).

311 Distribution Manager DM Ribbon After Spreadsheet Server is installed and initiated as an add-in to Excel, a custom Spreadsheet Server (SS) ribbon is added for Excel 2007 (and above). The SS ribbon may be used as a convenient alternative to access/process various functions in the application. Note: For Excel 2003, the SS ribbon is NOT applicable. If the SS ribbon does not appear, go to SS Settings and click the Add Excel Ribbon button (see SS Settings). Menu Item Description Distribute Distributes all specifications within the workbook. Click the arrow to access additional functions (see Distribute Specifications). All Distributes all specifications within the workbook. Selected Distributes only selected specifications. Clone Sheet Creates a copy of the current worksheet, leaving all formulas intact. Clone Sheet as Values Creates a copy of the current worksheet, converting all formulas to values. New Control Sheet Creates a new distribution control worksheet (see Create a Distribution Control Worksheet). Maintain Specs Opens the Maintain Specifications panel, allowing the user to create and/or maintain distribution criteria (see Add Specification Rows and Maintain Specification Rows). Settings Opens the Distribution Manager Settings - General panel, allowing the user to define various criteria to control processing and to access the Log Viewer panel, where the user may see information and error log entries, copy selected log entries, or clear the log file (see DM Settings and DM View Log). Global Software, Inc.

312 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 DM Settings Distribution Manager (DM) Settings allow the user to define various criteria to control processing. 1. In Excel from the DistMgr menu, select Settings. The Distribution Manager Settings - General panel appears. Nav Tip: This panel may also be accessed by selecting the toolbar or ribbon equivalent (see DM Toolbar or DM Ribbon). 2. Use the table to enter data on the General panel, or to access other functions. Field Description General Options: Enhanced Logging If selected, additional logging is recorded. For optimal processing, once an error has been resolved it is recommended to clear the log file and deselect the option (see DM View Log). Nav Tip: Use the View Log button to display, or clear the log file. Always Save Workbook Prior to Distribution If selected, all workbook changes are automatically saved prior to distribution.

313 Distribution Manager Field 305 Description Consolidate s If selected, multiple specification rows for a recipient in a distribution run are combined into a single with multiple attachments (one for each specification row). Otherwise, one is issued per specification row. Include Members When Only the Master is Selected If selected and only the group master specification row is selected for distribution, the system distributes the master and all member rows (as if the master and all member rows were individually selected). Otherwise, only selected specification rows are distributed. Right Justify Text Fields If selected, all text fields are right justified. Use "Microsoft Save as PDF" for PDF Creation If selected, Excel 2007 (and above) functionality is used to convert workbooks to PDFs (overriding the value in the PDF Printer Name field). Note: For Excel 2007 users, the 2007 Microsoft Office Add-In Microsoft Save as PDF or XPS must be downloaded to the user's PC to utilize this feature. PDF Printer Name If the Use "Microsoft Save as PDF" for PDF Creation option is not selected, then key the path or use the Browse button to select the printer to be used to convert objects to PDF. If blank, the system uses the Adobe PDF printer (if it exists), else it uses the default printer. Note: When using Adobe, the Adobe Distiller product is required to convert a document to a PDF file. The Distiller is not available for those users with only the Adobe Reader installed. Convert Formulas to Values Default: Specify the option to default for the Convert Formulas to Value field when adding a new distribution specification row. Button Description View Log Opens the Log Viewer panel, where the user may see information and error log entries, copy selected log entries, or clear the log file (see DM View Log). Global Software, Inc.

314 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Use the table to enter data on the panel. Field Description Options: Server Specify the server to be used for distributions. When SMTP is selected, additional setting options become available for input. Note: For Excel 2007 users, Collaboration Data Objects (CDO) must be installed for the Microsoft Outlook Exchange option to be available. When applicable, a link is available to install the component. Note: For Excel 2010 (or above) users, Distributor Outlook Add-In must be installed for the Microsoft Outlook Exchange option to be available. When applicable, a link is available to install the component with the ability to Run as Administrator if necessary. Note: When using SMTP certain mail configurations may prevent the transmission of messages. Contact your IT department for assistance. HTML When using server options Outlook 2010 (or above) or SMTP, if selected HTML editor is used for the body contents. Otherwise, plain text editor is utilized.

315 Distribution Manager Field Cache Address Book SMTP Options: Description For Excel 2010 (or above) users using server options Outlook or SMTP, if selected the address book is cached to prevent long waits when loading the address book. Note: When cached lists exist and the user deselects the option, a prompt appears ask ing if the lists should be deleted. When the SMTP server option is selected the following options are available for input: SMTP Mail Server Specify the SMTP mail server to be used for distributions. SMTP Sent "From" Address Specify the "from" address to be assigned to distributions. SMTP Advanced Options (Optional): When the SMTP server option is selected, if necessary, specify optional settings for the authentication account name and password, the SMTP port number, and SSL (secured socket layer) support. Click OK. The system writes the changes and closes the panel. Global Software, Inc.

316 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Create a Distribution Control Worksheet The columns on a distribution control worksheet are predefined by Global and should not be changed. However, the rows defined on a distribution control worksheet will depend upon an organization's reporting requirements. Note: The examples in this documentation are meant only to demonstrate the capabilities of the product. 1. In Excel from the DistMgr menu, select Create New Distribution Control Worksheet -or- select the ribbon equivalent (see DM Ribbon). The Create a New Distribution Control Worksheet panel appears. 2. Enter the New Worksheet name, and click Create. The Maintain Specifications panel appears.

317 Distribution Manager Use the table to enter data on the Maintain Specifications - General tab. Field Description Destination: Type Click the down arrow and select the destination type for the distribution. Valid types are , File Save, Group (member specification row that distributes only to the group master), and Print. Note: When printing the system prints to the user's default printer. Name Specify the name to be assigned to the distribution. The name must be unique for each specification row. If left blank, the current workbook name is used. If left blank on multiple specification rows, the current workbook name and an appended sequence number is used. This option does not apply when Destination Type = Group. File Type Click the down arrow and select the file type for the distribution. Valid types are Excel, Excel (xlsx), Excel (xlsm), Excel (xls), HTML, PDF, and None (do not distribute any sheets from the workbook). When the type Excel is selected, the system assigns the current workbook type. This option does not apply when Destination Type = Group. Note: Excel (xlsx) and (xlsm) file types only apply to Excel 2007 (and above) users. Folder When Destination Type = File Save, key the path or use the Browse button to select the folder location where the document will be saved. The destination location must be different than the source location. This option does not apply when Destination Type = , Group or Print. See the example below. Modify Cells: This section indicates the worksheet cells to receive designated values. To add cell parameters, click the down arrow and select the worksheet, enter the cell and value information, and then click the Add button. The parameters are displayed in the window below. To modify cell parameters, select the line in the window, and make the appropriate change(s). To remove a cell parameter, select the line in the window, and click the Remove button. To clear all parameter lines, click the Clear button. Example: For worksheet Income Statement, cell H4 will contain the value 5 (reporting period), and cell H6 will contain the value (reporting company). Global Software, Inc.

318 310 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Field Description Worksheet Specify the worksheet to receive the data. Cell Specify the cell to receive the data. Value Specify the value to be placed in the defined cell. Specify Worksheets: This section indicates the worksheets and chart objects from the active workbook to be included in the distribution. If blank, then all worksheets in the workbook will be distributed. When Destination Type = HTML, at least one worksheet must be specified. To select a worksheet, click the down arrow and select the desired worksheet, select whether or not to hide zero lines, and then click the Add button. The selected worksheet displays in the window below. To select all worksheets, select whether or not to hide zero lines, and then click the Add All button. All worksheets appear in the window below. To remove a worksheet, select the worksheet in the window, and click the Remove button. To clear all worksheets, click the Clear button. To control the order of worksheets in the distributed workbook, select the worksheet in the window, and click the appropriate arrow button to move the selected worksheet up or down in the list. Example: The Income Statement and Expanded Report worksheets have been selected, the target sheet names have been assigned and the hide zero lines option has been selected for both worksheets. Hide Zero Lines Default Specify the default value to be assigned when a worksheet is added to the selection. When no worksheets are selected, this option determines whether or not to hide zero lines for all distributed worksheets. Worksheet Specify the worksheet to be distributed. Target Sheet Name Specify the name to be assigned to the distributed worksheet. The name may be hard coded, a cell reference or merge data. Note: When using cell reference, syntax should begin with "=" (i.e. "=Sheet2!A3"). The "=" is not required when using merge data syntax (see Merge Data). Hide Zero Lines If selected, worksheet rows with zero values are hidden. This option only applies to rows with Global formulas. Protect Sheet If selected, the worksheet is protected during the distribution process. Note: The password to be used to unprotect the sheet is defined on the Maintain Specifications - Misc tab.

319 Distribution Manager 311 Field Description Convert Formulas to Values: Click the down arrow and specify which formulas, if any, should be converted to values. Valid options are Global Only (formulas created from Spreadsheet Server), All Formulas (all formulas on the worksheet), None (no conversion), and Global Only (Excel2000) (for Excel 2000 users only). Recalculate Before Sending: Specify whether or not to recalculate the worksheet(s), or to clear and recalculate PC cache before distributing. Note: If using DM to modify a cell, the work sheet is always recalculated regardless of the Recalculate Before Sending option selected. Generate GXEs If selected, all GXE formulas (Spreadsheet Server) are generated prior to distribution. Generate GEXDs If selected, all GEXD (Spreadsheet Server) formulas are generated prior to distribution. Zip Destination If selected, the workbook is zipped prior to distribution. This option does not apply when Destination Type = Group or Print. SPECS Row Placement: This section indicates on which Excel row to place the specifications. Replace Active Row If selected, specifications are pushed to the current active row on the Distribution Control sheet. Insert After Active Row If selected, specifications are inserted on a new row below the current active row on the Distribution Control sheet. Current SPECS Row Displays the row number of the specifications being displayed on the panel. Active Row Global Software, Inc. Displays the current active row on the Distribution Control worksheet.

320 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Use the table to enter data on the Maintain Specifications - tab. Note: The tab is only available when Destination Type = . Field Description To Specify the address(es) or when applicable click the To button to select the address(es) to which to distribute the associated document. Multiple addresses should be separated by a semicolon (;) or comma (,) depending on the server type. Note: The DM Settings' Consolidate s option controls whether a recipient included on multiple specification rows in a distribution run receives one with multiple attachments or one per specification row (see DM Settings). Subject Specify the subject line for the . Body Specify the body text for the . Generally a plain text editor is utilized; however, HTML editor offering various editing options (i.e. fonts, tables, insert pictures, etc.) may be available (see DM Settings).

321 Distribution Manager Use the table to enter data on the Maintain Specifications - Grouping tab. Note: Grouping is used to combine multiple specification rows' specified work sheet(s) into a single work book for distribution purposes. Refer to the example given on the panel. Field Description Group Master SPEC If selected, the specification row is a group master. When pushed to the Distribution Control worksheet, the value [GROUP SPEC #n] (where n is a system generated number) is assigned in the SPEC Group Control column. Note: Multiple group masters may be defined per work book. Member of Group Click the down arrow and select the destination name of the group master to which the specification row is a group member. When pushed to the Distribution Control worksheet, the system assigns the number associated with the group master in the SPEC Group Control column. Global Software, Inc.

322 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Use the table to enter data on the Maintain Specifications - Misc tab. Field Description Protection Passwords: Open Workbook Specify the password, if necessary, required to open the distributed workbook. Modify Workbook Specify the password, if necessary, required to modify the distributed workbook. Protect Sheet Specify the password, if necessary, required to unprotect sheets in the workbook which were protected during the distribution process. Workbook Macros: Beginning (Prior to Processing) Specify the name of the macro, if any, to be executed prior to distribution. Middle (Default) Specify the name of the macro, if any, to be executed during distribution. Ending (After Processing) Specify the name of the macro, if any, to be executed after distribution.

323 Distribution Manager Field Description Additional Attachments: This section indicates additional documents to attach during the distribution process. To select a document, click the Add button, then browse and select the desired document. To remove an attachment, select the attachment in the window, and click the Remove button. To clear all attachments, click the Clear button. Note: Attachments do not distribute when Destination Type = Print. Attachment Displays the name and location of the item to be sent as an attachment to the distribution. Merge Document Range Name Specify the range name from which to pull refreshed data elements into the associated attachment (see Merge Data). Once all data has been properly entered, use the table to select the appropriate row to be updated. Field Description SPECS Row Placement: This section indicates on which Excel row to place the specifications. Replace Active Row If selected, specifications are pushed to the current active row on the Distribution Control sheet. Insert After Active Row If selected, specifications are inserted on a new row below the current active row on the Distribution Control sheet. Current SPECS Row Displays the row number of the specifications being displayed on the panel. Active Row Displays the current active row on the Distribution Control worksheet. 8. Click the Push button to replace or insert the specifications on the Distribution Control worksheet. 9. Repeat steps 3-8 as necessary to create additional specification rows. 10. Click the Quit button. The Distribution Control worksheet appears. 11. Save the workbook. Global Software, Inc.

324 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Add Specification Rows Additional specification rows may be added to an existing Distribution Control worksheet by creating a new row or copying an existing row. To Add a New Specification Row: 1. On the Distribution Control worksheet, select a blank row, right click and select Distribution Manager>Maintain Specs -or- select the toolbar or ribbon equivalent (see DM Toolbar or DM Ribbon). The Maintain Specifications panel appears. 2. Continue with step 3 in the Create a Distribution Control Worksheet section. To Copy an Existing Row to Create a New Specification Row: 1. On the Distribution Control worksheet, select the desired specification row to be copied, right click and select Distribution Manager>Maintain Specs -or- select the toolbar or ribbon equivalent (see DM Toolbar or DM Ribbon). The Maintain Specifications panel appears. 2. Continue with step 3 in the Create a Distribution Control Worksheet section. To create a new specification row, ensure that the Insert After Active Row radio button is selected. 3. To copy an additional existing row to create a new row: On the Distribution Control worksheet, select the next specification row to be copied. On the Maintain Specifications panel, click the Retrieve SPECS From Current Excel Row button. The specifications from the current active row will default on the panel. Continue with step 3 in the Create a Distribution Control Worksheet section. To create a new specification row, ensure that the Insert After Active Row radio button is selected.

325 Distribution Manager Maintain Specification Rows Existing specification rows may be maintained by accessing the Maintain Specifications panel or by manually typing changes on the Distribution Control worksheet. To Maintain an Existing Row Via the Maintain Specifications Panel: 1. On the Distribution Control worksheet, select the desired specification row to be maintained, right click and select Distribution Manager>Maintain Specs -or- select the toolbar or ribbon equivalent (see DM Toolbar or DM Ribbon). The Maintain Specifications panel appears. 2. Continue with step 3 in the Create a Distribution Control Worksheet section. To maintain the existing specification row, ensure that the Replace Active Row radio button is selected. 3. To maintain an additional existing row: On the Distribution Control worksheet, select the next specification row to be maintained. On the Maintain Specifications panel, click the Retrieve SPECS From Current Excel Row button. The specifications from the current active row will default on the panel. Continue with step 3 in the Create a Distribution Control Worksheet section. To maintain the existing specification row, ensure that the Replace Active Row radio button is selected. To Maintain an Existing Row Manually: 1. On the Distribution Control worksheet, select the desired cell to be modified, and click on the down arrow to change data in the cell -or- type the desired information into the cell. Note: To avoid errors, it is recommended to use the Maintain Specifications panel (see above) for mak ing changes instead of typing the desired information into the cell. 2. Save the workbook. Global Software, Inc.

326 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Distribute Specifications Distribution specifications for a workbook may be distributed all at the same time or individually selected specifications may be distributed at the same time. Note: If the DM Settings option Always Save Prior to Distribution is not selected, it is imperative to save the work book prior to distributing specifications. Outlook must be open prior to distributing s via Outlook. To Distribute All Specifications: 1. Open the desired Distribution Control worksheet. 2. In Excel from the DistMgr menu, select Distribute All -or- select the toolbar or ribbon equivalent (see DM Toolbar or DM Ribbon). During the distribution process, a panel briefly appears displaying the various procedures being processed. This panel disappears when the distribution process is complete. To Distribute Individual Specifications: 1. Open the desired Distribution Control worksheet. 2. Select the desired specification row(s) to be distributed: To select a single specification -- select the desired specification row. To select multiple specifications -- press and hold the Ctrl key as specifications rows are selected. To select multiple specifications in a range -- select the first specification row in the range and drag the mouse to select additional desired rows in the range. 3. After the desired specification row(s) are selected, right click and select Distribution Manager>Distribute Selected or- select the ribbon equivalent (see DM Ribbon). During the distribution process, a panel briefly appears displaying the various procedures being processed. This panel disappears when the distribution process is complete. To Distribute Group Master and All Member Specifications Using Single Row Selection: 1. Access the DM Settings panel, select the Include Members When Only Master Selected option and click OK. 2. Open the desired Distribution Control worksheet. 3. Select the desired group master specification row to be distributed, right click and select Distribution Manager>Distribute Selected -or- select the ribbon equivalent (see DM Ribbon). The system distributes the group master and all member specification rows. To Distribute Group Master and Selected Member Specifications: 1. Open the desired Distribution Control worksheet. 2. Select the desired group master and member specification rows to be distributed, right click and select Distribution Manager>Distribute Selected -or- select the ribbon equivalent (see DM Ribbon). The system distributes the group master and selected member specification rows.

327 Distribution Manager 10.7 Miscellaneous DM Items Merge Data 319 Distribution Manager allows the user to add merge fields (place holders for data) in various specification fields, and then replace the merge fields with values during the distribution process. In addition, these merge fields may be used to update associated fields within an attached document. See below for one example of how this feature may be set up and utilized. Syntax: {'sheetname'!cellreference} Setup 1: Define merge fields within the spreadsheet, and assign a range name. Setup 2: Use Modify Cells to replace word merge data, and specify merge data in part of target sheet name. If desired, specify merge data within the Destination Name and Target Sheet Name fields. Global Software, Inc.

328 320 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Setup 3: Specify merge data within the To, Subject and Body fields. Setup 4: Add an attachment and assign the range name from which to retrieve values. Results: The system modifies cells and replaces text within the curly brackets { } with the actual values from the cells. In addition, the destination name is automatically added as a prefix to the distributed merge data attachment and the data in the merge range is merged into the attachment.

329 Distribution Manager Cache Address Book For Excel 2010 (or above) users using server options Outlook or SMTP, Distribution Manager allows the user to cache a local copy of a selected list to prevent long waits when loading the address book. lists may also be cached using the Profile Scheduler (see Address Book Cache). To Cache a Selected List: 1. Select the Cache Address Book option in the DM Settings function (see DM Settings). 2. From the Lists drop down list, select the desired list to be cached and then click the Cache Address List button. The selected list is cached locally on the computer. Subsequently when the list is accessed, the system uses the cached list, reducing the load time. 3. Repeat step 2 to select and cached additional lists -or- to refresh a previously cached address book. Note: If a cached list was created while using the Outlook server option and then the server option was changed to SMTP, the Outlook cached list would still be available but could not be refreshed since the Outlook server option is no longer selected. Global Software, Inc.

330 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Local Address List For Excel 2010 (or above) users using server options Outlook or SMTP, Distribution Manager allows the user to create a customized local address list. This feature is beneficial when distributions are only for a select group of users or if the addresses are not available from any other list. Addresses on the local list may be added, edited and deleted as necessary. To Create and Maintain a Local Address List: 1. From the Lists drop down list, select Distributor (Local). 2. Key the appropriate name and address (Alias and City are optional fields) and then click the Add button. Repeat to add additional names to the list. If necessary, click the to remove the associated name from the list.

331 Distribution Manager DM View Log During the distribution process, various logging information is recorded. If the DM Settings option Enhanced Logging is selected, then the system records additional logging data. Log entries may be viewed, copied or ed. 1. In Excel from the DistMgr menu, select Settings. The Distribution Manager Settings - General panel appears. Nav Tip: This panel may also be accessed by selecting the toolbar or ribbon equivalent (see DM Toolbar or DM Ribbon). 2. On the General panel, click View Log. The Log Viewer panel appears displaying the level, date, time, action, status, description and workbook for each log entry. In addition, in the bottom right hand corner the panel displays a count of the number of entries listed. Note: To select a different size font, click on the drop down arrow in the bottom right hand corner. 3. To copy selected records to the clipboard, on the Log Viewer panel first select the desired record(s) and then either click the Copy Selected Errors button -or- right click on the list and select Copy Selected Errors on the popup panel: To copy a single record -- select the desired record. To copy select multiple records -- press and hold the Ctrl key as records are selected in the list. To copy multiple records in a range -- select the first record in the range, press and hold the Shift key, and select the last record in the range. 4. To the entire error log to the help desk, click the Error Log button. The system opens a new Outlook panel with the error log attached. Modify the address and/or text of the body as necessary and click the Send button. Global Software, Inc.

332 324 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M To filter log entries for a specific workbook, click the Workbook down arrow and select the desired workbook. The system displays only entries for the selected workbook. 6. To filter for a specific date range of entries in the error log file, select the Filter on Date check box and specify the desired date range. The system displays only entries for the selected date range. 7. To filter for a specific level of entries in the error log file, select the desired level(s) in the Filter list. The system displays only entries for the selected level(s). 8. To search for a specific value in the error log file Action column, key the desired value in the Find What field and click the Find Next button. The system highlights the first log entry containing the value. Click the Find Next button again, to find the next occurrence of the selected value. 9. To clear the error log file, click the Clear Log button. 10. To display the full details of a log entry, double click the selected entry in the list. The Error Properties panel appears. Use the arrow buttons on the Error Properties panel to scroll up or down through the log entries in the list. To copy detail data for a single log entry to the clipboard, click the Copy button. Click the Close button to return to the Log Viewer panel. 11. To exit the Log Viewer panel, click the Close button.

333 Profile Scheduler Profile Scheduler The Profile Scheduler component in Spreadsheet Server allows for scheduling various tasks such as caching the Distribution Manager address book, refreshing workbooks, distributing Distribution Manager workbooks, and loading local database files. A user's ability to access the Profile Scheduler, to access the Database Management tab within Profile Scheduler, and to create, edit, delete and/or run a profile type is determined by parameter settings defined in User settings in the Configurator. Note: As Profile Scheduler work s with the Windows Task Scheduler, when scheduling and running profiles various user right assignments and set up conditions may be required based upon the profile type and process (see Profile Scheduler Overview). To Access the Profile Scheduler: 1. From the desktop, click Start>Programs>Global Software Spreadsheet Server>Profile Scheduler. The Profile Scheduler panel appears. Note: When not using Windows Single Signon, the user is first prompted to sign on to Spreadsheet Server. Global Software, Inc.

334 326 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 To Create a New Profile: 1. From the Profile Scheduler panel, select the Profiles tab. 2. To add a new profile, from the ribbon select New. The Select Profile Type panel appears. 3. Click the down arrow and select the desired profile type for which to create a new profile, and then click OK. The appropriate New Profile panel appears. Note: When the associated host configuration for a Load Local INF profile uses <Sign-On>, the user is first prompted to sign on to the database if not already connected. Use the following links to access specific profile type information: Address Book Cache Distribution Manager Load Local INF Load Local JDE To Maintain an Existing Profile: 1. From the Profile Scheduler panel, select the Profiles tab. 2. To modify an existing profile, double click the desired profile from the list -or- select the desired profile from the list and then from the ribbon select Edit. The appropriate profile panel appears. Note: When the associated host configuration for a Load Local INF or Load Local JDE profile uses <Sign-On>, the user is first prompted to sign on to the database if not already connected. To Run One or More Profiles: 1. From the Profile Scheduler panel, select the Profiles tab. 2. To run one or more profiles, select the Run check box for the desired profiles from the list, if desired select the Halt On Error option indicating to stop all processing when an error occurs, and then from the ribbon select Run. The system processes the profiles and updates the Start, Finish and Status fields accordingly. Note: When the associated host configuration for a Load Local INF or Load Local JDE profile uses <Sign-On>, the user is first prompted to sign on to the database if not already connected. When running a Distribution Manager profile if the user or connection is not set to auto-signon, then the user is first prompted to sign on to Spreadsheet Server.

335 Profile Scheduler Address Book Cache The Address Book Cache profile type is used to cache the address book lists used in Distribution Manager in order to reduce the time required to load the address book. To Create/Maintain an Address Book Cache Profile: 1. Use the table to enter data on the Address Book Cache - Profile tab. Field Description Profile Name Specify the name of the profile. Comments If desired, specify comments related to the profile. General Information: 2. Cache Global Address List / Cache Outlook Contacts Specify whether caching the Global Address List or Outlook Contacts. Note: The Outlook option is only available if Global's Outlook Add-In component has been loaded for Excel 2010 (or above) users. Address Book Cache Folder Key the path or use the Browse button to select the desired location for the Address Book Cache folder. Button Function Clear Cache Removes all cached files in the specified Address Book Cache folder. Address Book Opens the address book used in Distribution Manager. Proceed to the next step, Schedule Profile Task. Global Software, Inc.

336 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Distribution Manager Profile The Distribution Manager profile type is used to refresh selected workbooks with specified replacement values and/or to schedule the distribution of selected Distribution Manager workbooks. To Create/Maintain a Distribution Manager Profile: 1. Use the table to enter data on the Distribution Manager - Profile tab. Field Description Profile Name Specify the name of the profile. Comments If desired, specify comments related to the profile. Select the Workbooks to Process: This section indicates the workbooks and/or folder of workbooks to be included in the run. To add workbooks to the profile, specify the default values, click the Add Workbook(s) button, navigate to and select the desired workbook(s), and then click the Open button. To add a folder of workbooks to the profile, specify the default values, click the Add Folder button, navigate to and select the desired folder, and then click the Open button. To remove a workbook or folder, select the item in the window, and click the Remove button. To control the order of worksheets or folders in the list, select the item in the window, and click the appropriate arrow button to move the item up or down in the list.

337 Profile Scheduler Field 329 Description Run If selected, the workbook and/or workbooks in the folder are processed when the profile is run. Workbook Name Displays the name of the workbook or folder assigned to the profile. Start Macro If desired, specify the name of the macro to be run prior to refreshing and/ or distributing the workbook(s). Refresh If selected, the workbook and/or workbooks in the folder are refreshed using the replacement data on the Range Name Replacement tab during the run process (prior to distribution). Distribution If selected, the workbook and/or workbooks in the folder are distributed during the run process. End Macro If desired, specify the name of the macro to be run after refreshing and/or distributing the workbook(s). Run Default Specify the default Run value to be assigned when a workbook and/or folder is added to the profile. Refresh Default Specify the default Refresh value to be assigned when a workbook and/or folder is added to the profile. Distribution Default Specify the default Distribution value to be assigned when a workbook and/ or folder is added to the profile. Start Macro Default Specify the default Start Macro value to be assigned when a workbook and/or folder is added to the profile. End Macro Default Specify the default End Macro value to be assigned when a workbook and/ or folder is added to the profile. Halt on Error If selected, when running the profile if an error is encountered the system stops processing the profile. Otherwise, the system continues processing the next item in the profile list. Button Function Run Saves and closes the profile, and then processes all workbooks and/or workbooks in the folders which are selected to run. Global Software, Inc.

338 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Use the table to enter data on the Distribution Manager - Range Name Replacement tab. Field Description Range Name Replacement: This section indicates the ranges in the selected workbooks to be replaced with designated values. To display a list of range names in the workbooks assigned to the profile, click the Refresh button. To modify values, select the line in the window and make the appropriate change(s). To remove a range from the list, select the item in the window, and click the Remove button. To clear all ranges from the list, click the Clear button. Range Name Specify the name of the range to be replaced. Replacement Value Specify the value to be placed in the associated range. Button Function Run Saves and closes the profile, and then processes all workbooks and/or workbooks in the folders which are selected to run. Proceed to the next step, Schedule Profile Task.

339 Profile Scheduler Load Local INF The Load Local INF profile type is used to download account balance information from Infinium into local databases allowing for optimized calculation speeds. To Create/Maintain a Load Local INF Profile: 1. Use the table to enter data on the Load Local INF - Profile - Load Local tab. Field Description Profile Name Specify the name of the profile. Comments If desired, specify comments related to the profile. Database Location: Database Type Click the down arrow and select whether to load the the data into a SQL Server or MS Access type database. SQL Connection When using a SQL Server database type, click the down arrow and select the connection to be used for connecting to the database. The list only displays SQL Server connections which are flagged as load local connections and to which the user is authorized. Local Database Files Location (Local.accdb) When using a MS Access database type, key the path or use the Browse button to select the location for the local database files. Copy Loaded Database To When using a MS Access database type, if desired, key the path or use the Browse button to select the location to which to copy the loaded local database files. Results Window (no label) Global Software, Inc. Displays a list of what has been downloaded to the database.

340 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Use the table to enter data on the Load Local INF - Ledger Selections tab. Field Description Library Specify the library from which to retrieve data. From Year Click the down arrow and select the from reporting year. To Year Click the down arrow and select the to reporting year. Account Mask Specify the account mask(s) for which to retrieve balances. If not specified, balances are retrieved for all accounts. When entering an account mask each segment of the account string must be keyed and delimited by a dash (i.e ). Account segments may be a single value, mask (wildcard), range, value list or segment list. To add an account mask, key the account mask in the field and click the Add button. To remove an account mask, select the desired account mask in the list and click the Remove button. To remove all account masks, click the Clear All button. To retrieve account masks from the Configurator for the current user, click the Profile button. Note: Regardless of the Account Mask s defined for loading the local database, normal user security applies when using Spreadsheet Server. Account Mask SQL Displays the SQL statement to be used to retrieve the account mask(s). Data Replacement Option Specify when downloading data whether to find and replace downloaded records for only the year and type being processed, to find and replace records for only the accounts defined in the Account Mask section on the Ledger Selections tab, or clear all data for the selected library.

341 Profile Scheduler Field Description Year and Ledger to Include This list displays the available year(s)/ledger(s) based upon the selection criteria entered, and is used to select the desired year(s)/ledger(s) to be downloaded. To populate the list, complete all selection criteria above and then click the Populate Selection List button. To filter data in the list, enter the desired value in the appropriate column filter field. To select year(s), click the associated Include check box. To select all years, click the Select All button. To deselect all selected years, click the Unselect All button. Records to be Loaded Based upon the selected years/ledgers, the system displays the number of records to be loaded. Proceed to the next step, Schedule Profile Task. Global Software, Inc.

342 334 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M Load Local JDE The Load Local JDE profile type is used to download account balance information from JD Edwards into local databases allowing for optimized calculation speeds. To Create/Maintain a Load Local JDE Profile: 1. Use the table to enter data on the Load Local JDE - Profile - Load Local tab. Field Description Profile Name Specify the name of the profile. Comments If desired, specify comments related to the profile. Database Location: Database Type Click the down arrow and select whether to load the the data into a SQL Server or MS Access type database. SQL Connection When using a SQL Server database type, click the down arrow and select the connection to be used for connecting to the database. The list only displays SQL Server connections which are flagged as load local connections and to which the user is authorized. Local Database Files Location (Local.accdb) When using a MS Access database type, key the path or use the Browse button to select the location for the local database files. Copy Loaded Database To When using a MS Access database type, if desired, key the path or use the Browse button to select the location to which to copy the loaded local database files. Results Window (no label) Displays a list of what has been downloaded to the database.

343 Profile Scheduler Use the table to enter data on the Load Local JDE - Ledger Selections tab. Field Description Configuration Click the down arrow and select the host configuration from which to retrieve data. The list only displays configurations to which the user is authorized. Note: When the selected host configuration uses <Sign-On>, the user is prompted to sign on to the database if not already connected. From Year Click the down arrow and select the from reporting year. To Year Click the down arrow and select the to reporting year. Specific Ledger Types If desired, specify the ledger type(s) for which to retrieve balances. When selecting multiple types separate the types by a comma (i.e. AA,BA,CU). Summarize Balances by CO, BU, OBJ, and SUB If selected, account balances are summarized when the load is executed. Use Weekly F0902B for Selections If selected, account balances are retrieved from the Weekly F0902B file. Global Software, Inc.

344 336 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Field Description Account Mask Specify the account mask(s) for which to retrieve balances. If not specified, balances are retrieved for all accounts. When entering an account mask each segment of the account string must be keyed and delimited by a dash (i.e ). Account segments may be a single value, mask (wildcard), range, value list or segment list. To add an account mask, key the account mask in the field and click the Add button. To remove an account mask, select the desired account mask in the list and click the Remove button. To remove all account masks, click the Clear All button. To retrieve account masks from the Configurator for the current user, click the Profile button. Note: Regardless of the Account Mask s defined for loading the local database, normal user security applies when using Spreadsheet Server. Account Mask SQL Displays the SQL statement to be used to retrieve the account mask(s). Data Replacement Option Specify when downloading data whether to find and replace downloaded records for only the year and type being processed, to find and replace records for only the accounts defined in the Account Mask section on the Ledger Selections tab, or clear all data for the selected Configuration. 3. The Load Local JDE - Performance Indexes tab lists the available business unit and object account category codes, and allows for the user to select up to a maximum 22 of the most popular category codes used in Spreadsheet Server formulas. The system creates special indexes for the selected category codes, and uses these indexes to reduce the time required to process spreadsheet calculations. 4. Proceed to the next step, Schedule Profile Task.

345 Profile Scheduler Schedule Profile Task The Schedule tab allows the user to define various options as to when to execute the profile. As Profile Scheduler works with the Windows Task Scheduler, when scheduling and running profiles various user right assignments and set up conditions may be required based upon the profile type and process (see Profile Scheduler Overview). Note: Ensure all preceding steps have been completed prior to entering data on the Schedule tab. To Create/Maintain the Schedule for a Profile: 1. Use the table to enter data on the Schedule tab. Field Description Not Scheduled / Scheduled / Run Once Specify whether or not to schedule the execution of the profile. Appropriate processing fields become input capable based upon the option selected. Externally Managed If selected, indicates that the scheduled profile task has been changed via the Windows Task Scheduler function. When this option is selected, scheduling criteria fields on the panel are disabled. Note: This feature is not applicable in a Windows XP environment. Start Date Click the down arrow and select the date to start the profile task. Start Time Click the down arrow and select the time to start the profile task. Global Software, Inc.

346 338 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Field Description Daily: Daily is used for multiple daily consecutive profile runs. This option requires the user to assign a Start Date, Start Time, and Every specified number of Days or Hours. Note: When using Hours, the system begins with the Start Time and adds the number of hours up until midnight to create the scheduled task s. Weekly: Weekly is used for multiple profile runs for one or more days on a consecutive number of weeks. This option requires the user to assign a Start Date, Start Time, and Every specified number of Weeks for each selected Weekday. Monthly: Monthly is used for multiple profile runs for a specific day of each selected month. This option requires the user to assign a Start Date, Start Time, the specific week and day of the week for each selected Month -or- Days (specific day of the month). Note: In a Windows XP environment, when using the Days option only one day may be selected for scheduling the task. Windows Credentials: Allow Job to Run While Logged If selected, the scheduled job may be run while the user is logged off the Off PC. User Name Specify the user ID to be used for the scheduled job. Note: In a Windows XP environment, the user name is required when scheduling a task. Password Specify the password to be used for the scheduled job. The system retains the password entered until the Schedule panel is redisplayed. Note: In a Windows XP environment, the password is required when scheduling a task.

347 Profile Scheduler If scheduling a profile which contains mapped drives, proceed to the next step Define Mapped Drives. 3. Click OK. The system adds/updates the profile and, if appropriate, adds the job to the Windows Task Scheduler. Note: When the scheduled date and time are reached, the program reconnects to the host and initiates the task. Scheduled task s require the PC to be powered on; however, the user does not have to be signed into the operating system. Scheduled task s may be altered via Profile Scheduler or Windows Task Scheduler; however, they may only be stopped or deleted via the Task Scheduler. For Windows 7 environments and above, the Task Scheduler may accessed from the Profile Scheduler panel by selecting Task Scheduler from the ribbon. Global Software, Inc.

348 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177 Define Mapped Drives The Mapped Drive tab allows the user to define the mapped drives to be created temporarily when a scheduled profile is being processed. Mapped drives used in any part of the process, including Distribution Manager and Spreadsheet Server, must be defined. To Create/Maintain Mapped Drives for a Profile: Use the table to enter data on the Mapped Drive tab. Field Description Drive Click the down arrow and select the letter to be assigned to the mapped drive. Folder Key the path or use the Browse button to select the desired folder location for the mapped drive. Click OK. The system adds/updates the profile.

349 Profile Scheduler 11.7 Miscellaneous PS Items PS View Log 341 During the running a profile, various logging information is recorded. Log entries may be viewed, copied or ed. 1. From the Profile Scheduler panel, select the Log tab. The Log panel appears displaying the level, date, time, profile type, profile, action, and description for each log entry. 2. To display the full description of a log entry, select the desired entry in the list. The full description appears at the bottom of the panel. 3. To copy selected records to the clipboard, on the Log panel first select the desired record(s) and then from the ribbon select Copy Errors: To copy a single record -- select the desired record. To copy select multiple records -- press and hold the Ctrl key as records are selected in the list. To copy multiple records in a range -- select the first record in the range, press and hold the Shift key, and select the last record in the range. 4. To the entire error log to the help desk, from the ribbon select Log. The system opens a new Outlook panel with the error log attached. Modify the address and/or text of the body as necessary and click the Send button. 5. To filter the entries in the log file, select the desired level(s), containing text, or date/time range in the Filter sections. The system displays only entries matching the selection criteria. From the ribbon select Clear Filter to reset all filter fields to their default value. Global Software, Inc.

350 342 Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M To search for a specific value in the log file, key the desired value in the Search For field and then from the ribbon select Find Next. The system highlights the first log entry containing the value. Select Find Next again, to find the next occurrence of the selected value. 7. To clear the log file, from the ribbon select Clear Log.

351 Profile Scheduler Database Management The Database Management tab is used for listing and maintaining tables and indexes for SQL Server load local databases, including importing legacy Infinium or JDE load local access databases into SQL Server load local databases. In addition, user-specified queries may be run against the database (this feature is password protected). A user's ability to access the Database Management tab is determined by a parameter setting defined in User settings in the Configurator. Contact Global for more information. Global Software, Inc.